Mercedes - SLC - Owners Manual - 2018 - 2018

Your Operator's Manual Digital form inside the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle"). Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multimedia system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Digital form via the Internet You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Digital form as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google Play. Apple® iOS Android™ SLC É1725841102~ËÍ 1725841102 Order no. P172 0138 13 Part no. 172 584 11 02 Edition B 2018 SLC Operator's Manual Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: RDTS™ (Y page) YY Dis‐ play This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page. This text indicates a message on the multifunction display/multimedia display. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. This symbol indicates an instruction X that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succession X indicate an instruction with several steps. As at 28.03.2017 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Operator's Manual RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Operator's Manual: Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multimedia system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Digital form via the Internet The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital form as an App Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tablets. Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 1725841102 É1725841102~ËÍ 2 Contents Index ....................................................... 4 Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22 Introduction ........................................... 22 Operation ............................................... 22 Introduction ......................................... Protecting the environment ................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... Operator's Manual ................................. Service and vehicle operation ................ Operating safety .................................... QR codes for the rescue card ................ Data stored in the vehicle ...................... Information on copyright ....................... 23 23 23 24 24 26 28 28 30 At a glance ........................................... Cockpit .................................................. Instrument cluster ................................. Multifunction steering wheel ................. Center console ...................................... Overhead control panel ......................... Door control panel ................................. 31 31 32 33 34 36 37 Safety ................................................... Panic alarm ............................................ Occupant safety .................................... Children in the vehicle ........................... Pets in the vehicle ................................. Driving safety systems ........................... Protection against theft ......................... 38 38 38 53 56 56 63 Opening and closing ........................... SmartKey ............................................... Doors ..................................................... Trunk ..................................................... Side windows ......................................... Roof ....................................................... 65 65 70 72 74 77 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... Correct driver's seat position ................ Seats ..................................................... Steering wheel ....................................... Mirrors ................................................... 84 84 84 88 90 Memory function ................................... 93 Lights and windshield wipers ............ 95 Exterior lighting ..................................... 95 Interior lighting ...................................... 99 Replacing bulbs ..................................... 99 Windshield wipers ................................ 101 Climate control ................................. Overview of climate control systems ... Operating the climate control systems .................................................... Setting the air vents ............................ 104 104 Driving and parking .......................... Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... Driving ................................................. DYNAMIC SELECT button .................... Automatic transmission ....................... Refueling ............................................. Parking ................................................ Driving tips .......................................... Driving systems ................................... 115 115 115 121 122 129 131 134 138 On-board computer and displays .... Important safety notes ........................ Displays and operation ........................ Menus and submenus ......................... Display messages ................................ Warning and indicator lamps .............. 163 163 163 166 177 202 Multimedia system ........................... General notes ...................................... Important safety notes ........................ Function restrictions ............................ Operating system ................................ 211 211 211 211 212 108 113 Stowage and features ...................... 219 Stowage areas ..................................... 219 Features .............................................. 221 Maintenance and care ...................... 233 Engine compartment ........................... 233 Overview of the engine compartment .. 237 Contents ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 237 Care ..................................................... 238 Breakdown assistance ..................... Where will I find...? .............................. Flat tire ................................................ Battery (vehicle) .................................. Jump-starting ....................................... Towing and tow-starting ...................... Fuses ................................................... 244 244 246 251 253 256 258 Wheels and tires ............................... Important safety notes ........................ Operation ............................................ Winter operation .................................. Tire pressure ....................................... Loading the vehicle .............................. All about wheels and tires ................... Changing a wheel ................................ Wheel and tire combinations ............... Emergency spare wheel ....................... 260 260 260 262 263 271 273 280 284 285 Technical data ................................... Information regarding technical data ... Vehicle electronics .............................. Identification plates ............................. Service products and filling capacities ...................................................... Vehicle data ......................................... 288 288 288 289 290 295 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 179 Function/notes ................................ 57 Important safety notes .................... 57 Warning lamp ................................. 204 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 53 Activating media mode General notes ................................ 217 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 108 Active Brake Assist Activating or deactivating .............. 171 Display message ............................ 184 Function/notes ................................ 58 Active light function ............................ 97 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 63 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 59 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 60 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 149 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 189 Function/notes ................................ 97 Switching on/off .............................. 98 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 293 Address book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Adjusting the volume Multimedia system ........................ 212 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 50 Display message ............................ 187 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 44 Head bag ......................................... 45 Important safety notes .................... 43 Introduction ..................................... 43 Knee bag .......................................... 44 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 39 Side impact air bag .......................... 44 Air vents Important safety notes .................. 113 Setting ........................................... 113 Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents ............................. 114 Setting the center air vents ........... 113 Setting the side air vents ............... 113 Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 87 Air-conditioning system see Climate control AIRGUIDE ............................................. 81 AIRSCARF Problem (malfunction) ..................... 88 Switching on/off .............................. 87 AIRSCARF vents Setting the blower output .............. 114 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 64 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 64 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 64 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 172 Setting the color (on-board computer) ............................................. 173 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 175 AMG sports suspension (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) Function/notes ............................. 149 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 223 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 170 Index Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 170 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 237 Hiding a service message .............. 237 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 237 Service message ............................ 237 Special service requirements ......... 238 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 64 Function ........................................... 64 Switching off the alarm .................... 64 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 171 Display message ............................ 193 Function/notes ............................. 158 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 168 Audio system see Digital Operator's Manual Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 189 see Lights Automatic car wash (care) ............... 238 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 119 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 119 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 95 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 125 Changing gear ............................... 125 Display message ............................ 198 Drive program ................................ 125 Drive program display .................... 122 Driving tips .................................... 125 DYNAMIC SELECT button .............. 121 Emergency running mode .............. 129 Engaging drive position .................. 124 Engaging neutral ............................ 123 Engaging park position automatically ............................................... 123 Engaging reverse gear ................... 123 Engaging the park position ............ Gearshift recommendation ............ Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ...... Overview ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ....................................... 123 128 125 126 175 122 129 118 122 117 126 122 124 129 B Back button ....................................... 212 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 57 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 68 Important safety notes .................... 67 Replacing ......................................... 68 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 253 Display message ............................ 191 Important safety notes .................. 251 Jump starting ................................. 253 Overview ........................................ 251 Belt see Seat belts Belt warning ......................................... 42 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 171 Display message ............................ 194 Notes/function .............................. 159 Bluetooth® Searching for a mobile phone ........ 215 Searching for a mobile phone (device manager) ........................... 216 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Telephony ...................................... 215 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) 5 6 Index Brake fluid Display message ............................ 184 Notes ............................................. 293 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 60 Display message ............................ 189 Brakes ABS .................................................. 57 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 59 BAS .................................................. 57 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 293 Display message ............................ 179 EBD .................................................. 63 High-performance brake system .... 137 Important safety notes .................. 136 Maintenance .................................. 137 Parking brake ................................ 132 Riding tips ...................................... 136 Warning lamp ................................. 204 Breakdown assistance Reflective safety jacket .................. 244 Where will I find...? ........................ 244 see Flat tire see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 32 Bulbs see Replacing bulbs C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 24 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle Care Car wash ........................................ 238 Exhaust pipe .................................. 243 Exterior lights ................................ 242 Matte finish ................................... 240 Notes ............................................. 238 Paint .............................................. 240 CD Power washer ................................ Rear view camera .......................... Sensors ......................................... Washing by hand ........................... Wheels ........................................... Windows ........................................ Wiper blades .................................. 239 242 242 239 241 241 241 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 169 Center console Lower section .................................. 35 Upper section .................................. 34 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 173 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 65 Changing bulbs Side marker lamps (rear) ............... 101 Child Restraint system .............................. 55 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 56 On the front-passenger seat ............ 55 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 56 Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 54 Children in the vehicle Important safety notes .................... 53 Cigarette lighter ................................ 223 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 242 Climate control Air-conditioning system ................. 104 Automatic climate control (dualzone) .............................................. 106 Controlling automatically ............... 109 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 108 Defrosting the windows ................. 111 Defrosting the windshield .............. 110 General notes ................................ 104 Indicator lamp ................................ 109 Information about using automatic climate control ..................... 107 Maximum cooling .......................... 111 Notes on using the air-conditioning system ..................................... 105 Index Overview of systems ...................... 104 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 112 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 109 Refrigerant ..................................... 294 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 295 Setting the air distribution ............. 110 Setting the air vents ...................... 113 Setting the airflow ......................... 110 Setting the temperature ................ 109 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 112 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 112 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 111 Switching the ZONE function on/off ............................................ 110 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 31 see Instrument cluster Collapsible spare wheel Inflating ......................................... 286 see Emergency spare wheel Combination switch ............................ 96 Compass Calibrating ..................................... 232 Calling up ....................................... 231 Setting ........................................... 231 Connecting a USB device see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 166 Controller ........................................... 212 Convenience closing feature .............. 76 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 235 Display message ............................ 190 Filling capacity ............................... 294 Important safety notes .................. 293 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................ 175 Temperature gauge ........................ 164 Warning lamp ................................. 207 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 30 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 189 Function/notes ................................ 97 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 139 Deactivating ................................... 140 Display message ............................ 195 Driving system ............................... 138 Function/notes ............................. 138 Important safety notes .................. 139 Setting a speed .............................. 139 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 139 Cup holder Center console .............................. 222 Important safety notes .................. 221 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 27 Customer Relations Department ....... 27 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Data see Technical data Data carrier Selecting ........................................ 169 Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 189 Function/notes ................................ 95 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 172 Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Decorative film Cleaning instructions ..................... 240 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 173 Interior lighting .............................. 173 Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Digital Operator's Manual Help ................................................. 22 Introduction ..................................... 22 Digital speedometer ......................... 167 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 237 7 8 Index Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 178 Driving systems ............................. 193 Engine ............................................ 190 General notes ................................ 177 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 178 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 202 Lights ............................................. 189 Safety systems .............................. 179 SmartKey ....................................... 201 Tires ............................................... 196 Vehicle ........................................... 198 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Activating ....................................... 142 Calling up a speed ......................... 143 Cruise control lever ....................... 142 Display Message ............................ 195 Displays in the instrument cluster .. 145 Driving tips .................................... 146 Function/notes ............................. 140 Important safety notes .................. 141 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 145 Stopping ........................................ 144 Storing a speed .............................. 143 Switching off .................................. 146 Warning lamp ................................. 209 Distance recorder see Odometer see Trip odometer Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 209 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 58 Doors Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 173 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 71 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 65 Control panel ................................... 37 Display message ............................ 200 Emergency locking ........................... 72 Emergency unlocking ....................... 72 Important safety notes .................... 70 Opening (from inside) ...................... 71 Overview .......................................... 70 Drinking and driving ......................... 134 Drive program Automatic transmission ................. 125 Display ........................................... 122 SETUP (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 175 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 238 Driving on flooded roads .................. 138 Driving safety system Active Brake Assist .......................... 58 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 63 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 59 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 60 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 57 Distance warning function ............... 58 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 63 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 60 Important safety information ........... 56 Overview .......................................... 56 Driving system AMG sports suspension (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ............... 149 Driving systems Adaptive Damping System ............. 149 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 158 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 159 Cruise control ................................ 138 Display message ............................ 193 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 140 HOLD function ............................... 148 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 161 Lane Tracking package .................. 159 Parking Guidance ........................... 152 PARKTRONIC ................................. 149 Rear view camera .......................... 154 Driving tips Automatic transmission ................. 125 Brakes ........................................... 136 Break-in period .............................. 115 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 146 Downhill gradient ........................... 136 Drinking and driving ....................... 134 Driving in winter ............................. 138 Driving on flooded roads ................ 138 Index Driving on wet roads ...................... Exhaust check ............................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... Snow chains .................................. Subjecting brakes to a load ........... Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. DYNAMIC SELECT button .................. 138 134 134 134 138 138 137 262 136 136 169 211 121 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 174 Function/notes ................................ 89 EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ............................. 90 Function/notes ................................ 89 Switching on/off ........................... 174 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 181 Function/notes ................................ 63 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 135 On-board computer ....................... 166 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 119 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 119 Deactivating/activating ................. 120 General information ....................... 119 Important safety notes .................. 119 Introduction ................................... 118 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 53 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 72 Trunk ............................................... 74 Vehicle ............................................. 72 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 286 Important safety notes .................. 285 Removing ....................................... 286 Storage location ............................ 286 Stowing .......................................... 286 Technical data ............................... 286 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 50 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 24 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 207 Display message ............................ 190 ECO start/stop function ................ 118 Engine number ............................... 290 Irregular running ............................ 120 Jump-starting ................................. 253 Starting problems .......................... 120 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 118 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 118 Switching off .................................. 131 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 258 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 288 Problem (malfunction) ................... 120 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 235 Additives ........................................ 293 Checking the oil level ..................... 234 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 234 Display message ............................ 191 Filling capacity ............................... 293 General notes ................................ 292 Notes about oil grades ................... 292 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 234 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................ 175 Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 175 Characteristics ................................. 61 9 10 Index Deactivating/activating (except SLC 43 AMG) ................................... 61 Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................. 62 Display message ............................ 179 Function/notes ................................ 60 General notes .................................. 60 Important safety information ........... 60 Warning lamp ................................. 205 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 60 Exhaust check ................................... 134 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 243 Exterior lighting Setting options ................................ 95 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ......................................... 91 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 92 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 174 Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 91 Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 91 Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 92 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 93 Storing the parking position ............. 92 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 220 F Favorites Overview ........................................ Filler cap see Refueling Filling capacities (Technical data) ... First-aid kit ......................................... Flat tire MOExtended tires .......................... Preparing the vehicle ..................... TIREFIT kit ...................................... see Emergency spare wheel Floormats ........................................... Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. Two-way radio ................................ Fuel Additives ........................................ 292 Consumption statistics .................. 166 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 166 Displaying the range ...................... 166 Driving tips .................................... 134 Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 291 Important safety notes .................. 291 Problem (malfunction) ................... 131 Refueling ........................................ 129 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 291 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 130 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 166 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 291 Problem (malfunction) ................... 131 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... 245 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 258 Before changing ............................. 258 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 259 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 259 Important safety notes .................. 258 G 213 290 244 247 246 247 232 288 288 Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 231 General notes ................................ 228 Important safety notes .................. 228 Opening/closing the garage door .. 230 Problems when programming ........ 230 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 229 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 229 Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ......... 175 Genuine parts ...................................... 23 Glove box ........................................... 219 Index Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 H Hazard warning lamps Display message ............................ 201 Switching on/off .............................. 97 Head bags Display message ............................ 186 Operation ......................................... 45 Head level heating (AIRSCARF) .......... 87 Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 86 see NECK-PRO head restraints Headlamps see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High beam flasher ............................... 96 High-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 189 Replacing bulbs ............................. 100 Switching on/off .............................. 96 Hill start assist .................................. 118 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 148 Activation conditions ..................... 148 Deactivating ................................... 148 Display message ............................ 193 General notes ................................ 148 Home address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Hood Closing ........................................... 234 Display message ............................ 200 Important safety notes .................. 233 Opening ......................................... 233 Horn ...................................................... 31 Hydroplaning ..................................... 138 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 63 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 32 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 163 Interior lighting Automatic control ............................ 99 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 173 Overview .......................................... 99 Reading lamp ................................... 99 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 172 Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ......... 173 iPod® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 J Jack Storage location ............................ 245 Using ............................................. 281 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 253 K Key positions KEYLESS-GO .................................. 116 SmartKey ....................................... 116 KEYLESS-GO Activating ......................................... 65 Convenience closing feature ............ 76 Deactivation ..................................... 65 Display message ............................ 202 Locking ............................................ 65 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 117 Start/Stop button .......................... 116 Starting the engine ........................ 118 Unlocking ......................................... 65 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 125 Manual gearshifting ....................... 128 Knee bag .............................................. 44 11 12 Index L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 171 Display message ............................ 193 Function/information .................... 161 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 175 License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 189 Light function, active Display message ............................ 189 Light sensor (display message) ....... 189 Lights Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 173 Active light function ......................... 97 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 95 Cornering light function ................... 97 Hazard warning lamps ..................... 97 High beam flasher ............................ 96 High-beam headlamps ..................... 96 Light switch ..................................... 95 Low-beam headlamps ...................... 96 Parking lamps .................................. 96 Rear fog lamp .................................. 96 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 172 Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ......... 173 Standing lamps ................................ 96 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 172 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 173 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 173 Turn signals ..................................... 96 see Interior lighting see Replacing the bulbs Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 71 Emergency locking ........................... 72 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 71 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 174 Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 189 Replacing bulbs ............................. 100 Switching on/off .............................. 96 Luggage cover see Trunk partition Lumbar support ................................... 87 M M+S tires ............................................ 262 MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 82 Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 240 mbrace Call priority .................................... 227 Display message ............................ 184 Emergency call .............................. 225 General notes ................................ 224 MB info call button ........................ 226 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 227 Roadside assistance button ........... 226 Self-test ......................................... 224 System .......................................... 224 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 67 General notes .................................. 67 Inserting .......................................... 67 Locking vehicle ................................ 72 Removing ......................................... 67 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 72 Media Interface see Digital Operator's Manual Memory card (audio) ......................... 169 Memory function ................................. 93 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Rear view camera .......................... 154 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 178 Index Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 215 Connecting (device manager) ........ 216 Frequencies ................................... 288 Installation ..................................... 288 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 169 Transmission output (maximum) .... 288 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 66 MOExtended tires .............................. 247 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 284 Mounting a new wheel ................... 283 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 281 Raising the vehicle ......................... 281 Removing a wheel .......................... 283 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 281 MP3 Operation ....................................... 169 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 165 Permanent display ......................... 172 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 164 Overview .......................................... 33 Multimedia system Switching on and off ...................... 212 Music files see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 N Navigation Entering a destination .................... 213 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 167 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Navigation menu Important safety notes .................. 167 NECK-PRO head restraints Important safety notes .................... 52 Operation ......................................... 52 Resetting triggered .......................... 53 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 115 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... 46 Faults ............................................... 49 Operation ......................................... 46 System self-test ............................... 48 Occupant safety Air bags ........................................... 43 Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 53 Belt warning ..................................... 42 Children in the vehicle ..................... 53 Important safety notes .................... 38 Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. 38 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 39 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 56 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 53 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 38 Seat belt .......................................... 39 OCS Conditions ....................................... 46 Faults ............................................... 49 Operation ......................................... 46 System self-test ............................... 48 Odometer ........................................... 166 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 175 Assistance menu ........................... 170 Audio menu ................................... 168 Convenience submenu .................. 174 13 14 Index Display messages .......................... 177 Displaying a service message ........ 237 Factory settings submenu ............. 175 Important safety notes .................. 163 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 172 Lighting submenu .......................... 172 Menu overview .............................. 166 Message memory .......................... 178 Navigation menu ............................ 167 Operation ....................................... 164 RACETIMER ................................... 175 Service menu ................................. 171 Settings menu ............................... 172 Standard display ............................ 166 Telephone menu ............................ 169 Trip menu ...................................... 166 Vehicle submenu ........................... 173 Video DVD operation ..................... 169 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Important safety notes .................... 26 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 22 Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ........................... 24 Outside temperature display ........... 163 Overhead control panel ...................... 36 P Paddle shifters see Steering wheel paddle shifters Paint code number ............................ 289 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 240 Panic alarm .......................................... 38 Parking Important safety notes .................. 131 Parking brake ................................ 132 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ................................. 92 Rear view camera .......................... 154 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Parking Guidance ........................... 152 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 151 Important safety notes .................. 149 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 152 Sensor range ................................. 150 Warning display ............................. 151 Parking brake Applying automatically ................... 133 Applying or releasing manually ...... 132 Display message ............................ 181 Electric parking brake .................... 132 Emergency braking ........................ 133 General notes ................................ 132 Releasing automatically ................. 133 Warning lamp ................................. 206 Parking Guidance Display message ............................ 194 Important safety notes .................. 152 Parking lamps Switching on/off .............................. 96 PARKTRONIC Driving system ............................... 149 Function/notes ............................. 149 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 187 Indicator lamps ................................ 39 Problems (malfunction) .................. 187 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56 Phone book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Pivoting draft stop see AIRGUIDE Power washers .................................. 239 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Display message ............................ 184 Operation ......................................... 53 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 64 Immobilizer ...................................... 63 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 23 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 118 Index General notes ................................ 118 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 28 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 R RACE TIMER (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 175 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 168 see Digital Operator's Manual Radio mode see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Reading lamp ....................................... 99 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 189 Switching on/off .............................. 96 Rear lamps see Lights Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 242 Display in the multimedia system .. 155 Function/notes ............................. 154 Switching on/off ........................... 155 Rear window defroster General notes ................................ 111 Problem (malfunction) ................... 112 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 90 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 92 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 294 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Important safety notes .................. 129 Refueling process .......................... 130 see Fuel Remote control Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 229 Replacing bulbs High-beam headlamps ................... 100 Important safety notes .................... 99 Installing/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 100 Low-beam headlamps .................... 100 Overview of bulb types .................. 100 Reporting safety defects .................... 27 Rescue card ......................................... 28 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 192 Warning lamp ................................. 207 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 112 Restraint system Display message ............................ 185 Introduction ..................................... 38 Warning lamp ................................. 206 Warning lamp (function) ................... 38 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmission) ............................................... 123 Reversible floor panel (trunk) .......... 221 Reversing feature Side windows ................................... 74 Reversing lamps (display message) ................................................... 189 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25 Roof Display message ............................ 200 Important safety notes .................... 77 Opening/closing (with roof switch) ............................................. 78 Opening/closing (with SmartKey) .... 79 Overview .......................................... 77 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 83 Relocking ......................................... 79 Roof carrier ........................................ 221 Roof switch .......................................... 78 Route guidance see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Route guidance active ...................... 167 15 16 Index S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 53 see Occupant safety Safety system see Driving safety systems SD card Inserting ........................................ 217 Inserting/removing ........................ 217 Removing ....................................... 217 SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Selecting ........................................ 169 Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Seat Correct driver's seat position ........... 84 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 42 Correct usage .................................. 41 Fastening ......................................... 42 Important safety guidelines ............. 40 Introduction ..................................... 39 Releasing ......................................... 42 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 174 Warning lamp ................................. 203 Warning lamp (function) ................... 42 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 86 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 86 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 87 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 86 Important safety notes .................... 84 Overview .......................................... 84 Seat heating problem ...................... 87 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 93 Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 87 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 87 Selector lever Positions ........................................ 122 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 242 Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 171 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 293 Coolant (engine) ............................ 293 Engine oil ....................................... 292 Fuel ................................................ 291 Important safety notes .................. 290 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 294 Washer fluid ................................... 294 Setting the air distribution ............... 110 Setting the airflow ............................ 110 Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 175 On-board computer ....................... 172 SETUP (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 175 Side impact air bag ............................. 44 Side marker lamp Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 101 Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 189 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 241 Convenience closing feature ............ 76 Important safety information ........... 74 Opening/closing (all) ....................... 75 Opening/closing (front) ................... 75 Overview .......................................... 74 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 76 Resetting ......................................... 76 Reversing feature ............................. 74 SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Index SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 68 Changing the programming ............. 66 Checking the battery ....................... 68 Display message ............................ 201 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 65 Important safety notes .................... 65 Loss ................................................. 69 Mechanical key ................................ 67 Opening/closing the roof ................ 79 Overview .......................................... 65 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 116 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 69 Starting the engine ........................ 118 SMS see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Snow chains ...................................... 262 Sockets Center console .............................. 223 General notes ................................ 223 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 212 Special seat belt retractor .................. 54 Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Digital ............................................ 167 In the Instrument cluster ................. 32 Segments ...................................... 163 Selecting the display unit ............... 172 Sport handling mode Activating/deactivating (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................. 62 Warning lamp ................................. 206 Standing lamps Display message ............................ 189 Switching on/off .............................. 96 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 117 Steering Display message ............................ 200 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 89 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 88 Button overview ............................... 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 164 Important safety notes .................... 88 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 93 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 126 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 175 Stowage areas ................................... 219 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 219 Center console .............................. 220 Cup holders ................................... 221 Door ............................................... 220 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 220 Glove box ....................................... 219 Important safety information ......... 219 Rear wall ........................................ 220 Stowage net ................................... 220 Stowage net ....................................... 220 Summer tires ..................................... 262 Sun visor ............................................ 222 Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. 173 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 112 Switching on media mode Via the device list .......................... 217 T Tachometer ........................................ 163 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 189 see Lights Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 290 Emergency spare wheel ................. 286 Information .................................... 288 Tires/wheels ................................. 284 Vehicle data ................................... 295 TELEAID Call priority .................................... 227 Emergency call .............................. 225 General notes ................................ 224 MB info call button ........................ 226 Roadside Assistance button .......... 226 Self-test ......................................... 224 17 18 Index System .......................................... Vehicle Health Check .................... Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... Authorizing a mobile phone via the device manager (connecting) ......... Connecting a mobile phone (device manager) ........................... Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ Display message ............................ Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Redialing ........................................ Rejecting/ending a call ................. see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Temperature Coolant .......................................... Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................ Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................ Outside temperature ...................... Setting (climate control) ................ Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ...... Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Checking manually ........................ Display message ............................ Maximum ....................................... Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Notes ............................................. Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. 224 227 170 215 216 216 215 200 169 170 170 170 211 164 175 175 163 109 175 175 267 266 196 266 249 265 249 263 266 267 267 269 267 General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tire-change tool kit ........................... TIREFIT kit .......................................... Important safety notes .................. Storage location ............................ Tire pressure not reached .............. Tire pressure reached .................... Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Information on driving .................... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... M+S tires ....................................... 267 268 270 270 210 269 246 247 247 246 249 249 279 278 278 280 278 260 279 278 280 196 280 278 277 278 279 279 260 278 260 279 275 280 277 279 262 Index Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... MOExtended tires .......................... Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ Overview ........................................ PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Sidewall (definition) ....................... Speed rating (definition) ................ Storing ........................................... Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... Summer tires ................................. Temperature .................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... Tire bead (definition) ...................... Tire pressure (definition) ................ Tire pressures (recommended) ...... Tire size (data) ............................... Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... Tire tread ....................................... Tire tread (definition) ..................... Total load limit (definition) ............. Traction ......................................... Traction (definition) ....................... Tread wear ..................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... Wear indicator (definition) ............. Wheel and tire combination ........... Wheel rim (definition) .................... see Flat tire Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ Important safety notes .................. 279 279 279 277 279 262 280 260 279 280 261 279 279 281 278 262 274 280 279 279 278 284 275 261 279 280 274 280 274 273 278 280 284 278 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 256 Installing the towing eye ................ 256 Removing the towing eye ............... 257 Transporting the vehicle ................ 258 With both axles on the ground ....... 257 With the rear axle raised ................ 257 Traffic reports see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Transmission Selector lever ................................ 122 see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 122 Transporting the vehicle .................. 258 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 166 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 166 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 167 Trunk Emergency release .......................... 73 Important safety notes .................... 72 Locking separately ........................... 73 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 73 Overview .......................................... 72 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 200 Opening dimensions ...................... 295 Trunk partition Display message ............................ 200 General notes .................................. 79 Opening/closing .............................. 80 Turn signals Display message ............................ 189 Switching on/off .............................. 96 Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 288 Installation ..................................... 288 Transmission output (maximum) .... 288 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U 258 256 Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 72 19 20 Index From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 71 Upshift indicator (on-board computer, MercedesAMG SLC 43) ................................. 175 USB devices Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 218 V Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 27 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 198 Electronics ..................................... 288 Equipment ....................................... 24 Individual settings .......................... 172 Limited Warranty ............................. 28 Loading .......................................... 271 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 72 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 65 Lowering ........................................ 284 Maintenance .................................... 25 Parking for a long period ................ 133 Pulling away ................................... 118 Raising ........................................... 281 Reporting problems ......................... 27 Securing from rolling away ............ 281 Tow-starting ................................... 256 Towing away .................................. 256 Transporting .................................. 258 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 72 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 65 Vehicle data ................................... 295 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data ....................................... 295 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 295 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 72 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 289 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 245 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 169 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 VIN Seat ............................................... 290 Type plate ...................................... 289 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 204 Active Brake Assist ........................ 209 Brake Assist ................................... 209 Brakes ........................................... 204 Check Engine ................................. 207 Coolant .......................................... 207 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 209 Distance warning ........................... 209 ESP® .............................................. 205 ESP® OFF ....................................... 206 Fuel tank ........................................ 207 General notes ................................ 202 Parking brake ................................ 206 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 39 Reserve fuel ................................... 207 Restraint system ............................ 206 Seat belt ........................................ 203 SPORT handling mode ................... 206 Tire pressure monitor .................... 210 Warning triangle ................................ 244 Warranty .............................................. 24 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 201 Weather display (COMAND) see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 211 Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 284 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 284 Wheel chock ...................................... 281 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 280 Checking ........................................ 260 Cleaning ......................................... 241 Emergency spare wheel ................. 285 Important safety notes .................. 260 Information on driving .................... 260 Interchanging/changing ................ 280 Mounting a new wheel ................... 283 Mounting a wheel .......................... 281 Overview ........................................ 260 Index Removing a wheel .......................... 283 Storing ........................................... 281 Tightening torque ........................... 284 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 284 Wind screen Inserting and removing .................... 80 Preparing for installation .................. 80 see AIRGUIDE Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 110 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 236 Important safety notes .................. 294 Windshield wipers Display message ............................ 201 Problem (malfunction) ................... 103 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 101 Switching on/off ........................... 101 Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 262 Slippery road surfaces ................... 138 Snow chains .................................. 262 Winter operation Overview ........................................ 262 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 262 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 241 Important safety notes .................. 101 Replacing ....................................... 101 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 110 21 Digital Operator's Manual 22 Introduction The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia system. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. Operation Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Press the Ø button in the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears. X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Operator's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 212). Content pages The content pages can be accessed by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information texts or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select % symbol ?. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background. X Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ralways Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant Z Introduction Protecting the environment 23 Introduction 24 Service and vehicle operation systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 289). Operator's Manual tions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Vehicle equipment i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and condi- Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you Service and vehicle operation Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Z Introduction have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair. (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair. (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 25 26 Operating safety Introduction Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the loads they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. When using floormats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place several floormats or carpets on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtechnical data for the vehicle Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: Z 27 Introduction Operating safety Introduction 28 Data stored in the vehicle The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual regarding the correct operation of your vehicle and possible damage to the vehicle. Damage to the vehicle which is caused by violation of these notes is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new or used-vehicle warranty. QR codes for the rescue card The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html. Data stored in the vehicle Data storage A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rvehicle's operating state Rincidents Rmalfunctions In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimize vehicle function The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: RHow various systems in your vehicle were operating RWhether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and RHow fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. Z 29 Introduction Data stored in the vehicle Introduction 30 Information on copyright This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Cockpit 31 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shifters ; Combination switch 96 = Instrument cluster 32 ? Horn A Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display B Function Page E Adjusts the steering wheel manually 88 F Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 88 G Cruise control lever 139 H Electric parking brake 132 149 I Diagnostics connection Overhead control panel 36 J Opens the hood C Climate control systems 104 K Light switch D Ignition lock Start/Stop button 116 116 126 27 233 95 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Function : Speedometer with segments Warning and indicator lamps: Electric parking brake (red) F USA only ! Canada only ! Electric parking brake (yellow) · Distance warning å ESP® OFF ! ABS Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only L Low-beam headlamps T Parking lamps K High-beam headlamps ÷ ESP® Page 163 206 206 209 205 204 204 96 96 96 205 ; #! Turn signals = Multifunction display 165 ? Tachometer 163 A B 96 Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found C Function Warning and indicator lamps: M SPORT handling mode in the Mercedes-AMG SLC 43 R Rear fog lamp N This indicator lamp has no function ; Check Engine h Tire pressure monitor 6 Restraint system ü Seat belts Page Coolant temperature gauge Warning and indicator lamps: ? Coolant 164 206 96 207 210 38 203 207 Fuel level indicator Warning and indicator lamps: 8 Reserve fuel level with fuel filler flap location indicator (right) 207 Instrument cluster lighting 163 under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 163). Multifunction steering wheel 33 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Multimedia system display = ? Switches on voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System 8 Mute WX Adjusts the volume ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits the telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory i In vehicles with multimedia system Page 165 Function ? 169 COMAND you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms a selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System Page 164 164 164 178 164 i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 you can find further information: the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the voice-operated control of the navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions Ron 34 Center console Center console At a glance Center console, upper section Function Page Function Page : Multimedia system 212 B £ Hazard warning lamps 97 ; c Seat heating 87 C = Ò AIRSCARF 87 a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 46 ? c Parking Assist PARKTRONIC D å ESP® 60 149 E A è ECO start/stop function à DYNAMIC SELECT button 118 i In vehicles with multimedia system COMAND you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions 121 i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron voice-controlled navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions Center console 35 At a glance Center console, lower section Function F Page Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket 220 223 223 223 G Selector lever 122 H Stowage compartment Cup holder 221 Function I Stowage compartment with Media Interface J Roof switch cover K Multimedia system controller L p Manual drive program for the automatic transmission Page 219 78 126 36 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 99 ; c Switches the interior lighting on/off 99 = µ Operates MAGIC SKY CONTROL ? p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off A | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off Function Page B Eyeglasses compartment 220 C ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) 226 D Rear-view mirror 82 E Buttons for the garage door opener 230 99 F F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 226 G G SOS button (mbrace system) 225 99 90 Door control panel 37 At a glance Door control panel Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 71 B ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle \ Selects the right exterior mirror 91 71 C = Adjusts the seats electrically 86 W Opens/closes the right side window 74 ? r45= Stores seat, exterior mirror and steering column adjustment settings D W Opens/closes the left side window 74 93 E 7 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 91 ö Folds the exterior mirrors in/out 91 F Z Selects the left exterior mirror 91 A Occupant safety 38 Safety Panic alarm To activate: press ! button : for at least one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. X Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system RAir bags The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 41) Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted properly (Y page 84) As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 84). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 43). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 50). See "Children in the vehicle" for information on children traveling with you in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems (Y page 53). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1‑800‑367‑6372). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning Device or the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 45). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 39) and "Air bags" (Y page 43). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle Z 39 Safety Occupant safety Safety 40 Occupant safety occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply by the seat belt guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters are synchronized with the front air bags which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, in the event of an accident the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side impact air bag, in addition to other systems, may be triggered and have to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. G WARNING If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an acci- dent or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 41) Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted properly (Y page 84) G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems. Occupant safety G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified. Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only into the belt buckle belonging to that seat Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed across the center of your shoulder The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck or be routed under your arm or behind your back. Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap as low down as possible The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the notes in the "Stowage options/compartments" section for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 219). Z Safety If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 45) 41 Occupant safety 42 Fastening seat belts Safety Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 41). Basic illustration Adjust the seat (Y page 84). The seat backrest must be in an almost upright position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat belt guide = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 42). X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. In order to attach the child restraint system securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the frontpassenger seat is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. Further information on the "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 54). X Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back. Seat belt adjustment Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the "belt adjustment" function is not available. The belt adjustment is a convenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE®. With this function, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle occupant. The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if: Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not grab hold of the seat belt. The belt adjustment can be switched on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 174). Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If the doors are closed and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. Air bags Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIRBAG marking. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 50). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forward or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 39). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment Z 43 Safety Occupant safety 44 Occupant safety area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side windows Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place Safety G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front air bags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the driver's and front-passenger seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 39). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 45). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 46) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Knee bags Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ; under the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection. Side impact air bags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) Occupant safety Head air bags Safety could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. 45 Side impact air bags : deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: RHead RNeck RArms If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Head bags : deploy in the area of the side windows at the front. When deployed, the head bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the: Rchest Rarms If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the head bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a head bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 50). The head bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the head bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. Z 46 Occupant safety The system does not deactivate: side impact air bag Rthe headbag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Rthe Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) Safety Requirements To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 187). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey. Occupant safety Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 49). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt guide. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS determines that: RThe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. Make sure that the conditions for a correct classification are met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Z Safety G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: 47 48 Occupant safety Safety RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53). When the Occupant Classification System (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- Occupant safety G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forward- facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 46). If the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 49). Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 48). Z Safety passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 49 50 Occupant safety Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorBAG OFF indicator lamp rect. lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person even though the fronton the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 46). passenger seat is occuX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpied by an adult or a perpassenger seat may not be used. son of a stature correX Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedessponding to that of an Benz Center. adult. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child does not light up and/or seat. does not stay on. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, Runoccupied adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Roccupied by the weight of a child up to X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger twelve months old in a seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child child restraint system restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. For your own safety and that of your front passenger, it is important that you have deployed air bags replaced and faulty air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and some powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 38) Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective seat If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and frontpassenger knee bags The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 39). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bags is determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed Z 51 Safety Occupant safety Safety 52 Occupant safety are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint system are deployed independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. RSide impact air bag on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RHead bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation RHead bags on the driver's and frontpassenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident: RFrontal collision RSide impact RRollover NECK-PRO head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you: Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the head restraints, for example Ruse head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury. Do not attach any objects to the head restraints and do not use head restraint covers. Method of operation NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries. The NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of a certain severity. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered in an accident, you must reset the NECKPRO head restraints on the driver’s and frontpassenger seat (Y page 53). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can recognize when NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for functionality at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision. Children in the vehicle Do not insert your finger between the upholstery of the head restraint and the seat. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints. X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down as far as it will go in the direction of arrow ;. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECKPRO head restraint. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system) PRE-SAFE® informs you of certain critical driving situations and takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can take the following measures independently of each other: Rpre-tensioning the driver's and frontpassenger seatbelt. Rclosing the side windows. Rvehicles with a memory function: setting a more favorable seat position for the frontpassenger seat. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Should an accident not occur, the preventative measures taken are reversed. Certain settings must be made yourself. X If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. Seat belt pre-tensioning is released. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched on Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rvehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised when the driver's door is opened Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is switched off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call Children in the vehicle Important safety notes If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)". (Y page 45) Z Safety Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints 53 54 Children in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Safety Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 41). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat. Special seatbelt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. The seat belt on the front-passenger's side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the belt loop. X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. X Activating the special seat belt retractor: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled. X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. X Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button of the seat belt buckle, hold the belt tongue and guide it back towards the belt loop. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely can be found under “Stowing options/stowage compartments” (Y page 219). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. The securing system of child restraint systems is the seat belt system. i If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45). There you will also find information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the Z 55 Safety Children in the vehicle Safety 56 Driving safety systems instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 39) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the frontpassenger seat belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward and down from the front-passenger seat belt guide. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 57) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 57) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 58) RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 60) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 60) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 63) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 63) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. Driving safety systems become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 204) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 179). Brakes If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. X BAS (Brake Assist System) ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 56). G WARNING If ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics would be severely affected. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 56). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also Z Safety You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 260). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. 57 58 Driving safety systems Active Brake Assist General information Safety i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 56). Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist. Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist system supports you. Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on the Active Brake Assist system has just been carried out Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 115). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist is automatically active after switching on the ignition. You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 171). When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display. Distance warning function General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 56). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering The distance warning function may not give warnings in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Rnot Driving safety systems Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake Assist can assist with the autonomous braking function. If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Vehicles without Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Vehicles with Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene. If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 53). Adaptive Brake Assist General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 56). With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 53). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. Z Safety Function 59 60 Driving safety systems Important safety notes Safety G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 97). Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions. Rto Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. Adaptive brake lights i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 56). If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic traveling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 56). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 56). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning it will not provide any vehicle stabilization. There is an increased risk of skidding or of an accident. Exercise caution when continuing to drive. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems When towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 257). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, then ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 205) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 179). You can select between the following states of ESP®: i Only use wheels with the recommended tire It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X RESP® RESP® is activated is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® ECO start/stop function X To deactivate: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 56). Z Safety G WARNING The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off. Activating/deactivating ESP® (except Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) 61 62 Driving safety systems Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated ESP® If is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: Safety RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin Rtraction control is still activated RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly Rengine In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Activating/deactivating ESP® (except Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an Important safety notes Deactivating/activating ESP® i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. tion (Y page 56). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® is activated handling mode is activated RESP® is deactivated. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT Handling Mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Protection against theft Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree Rtraction control is still activated Rengine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin Rtraction control is still activated RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly Rengine EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 56). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 204) as well as display messages (Y page 181). ADAPTIVE BRAKE i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 56). ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 148) and hill start assist (Y page 118). Protection against theft Immobilizer To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The Z Safety To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. X 63 Protection against theft 64 engine can be started by anyone with a valid SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. X i The immobilizer is always deactivated when Safety you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) or To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. X If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood Rthe glove box Rthe stowage space under the armrest X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is stopped. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is stopped. SmartKey SmartKey 65 SmartKey functions Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. : & Locks the vehicle ; F Unlocks the trunk lid = % Unlocks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. protection is reactivated. Ranti-theft X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe stowage compartment in the center console Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 174). When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 173). KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 118). Z Opening and closing Roperate SmartKey 66 Opening and closing Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen the external door handles are touched To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 76). X Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the key. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserv- ing battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp (Y page 68) of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means only the driver's door, the lockable stowage compartments in the vehicle interior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp (Y page 68) flashes twice. If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the driver or front-passenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. SmartKey To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 68) flashes twice. Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESSGO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 64). Removing the mechanical key X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. For further information about: the driver's door (Y page 72) Runlocking the trunk (Y page 73) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 72) Runlocking Inserting the mechanical key X SmartKey battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Z Opening and closing X 67 SmartKey 68 Opening and closing Checking the battery Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 68). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- X Replacing the battery X X cialist workshop. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 67). X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey (Y page 67). X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. SmartKey 69 Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 65). KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary (Y page 68). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Z Opening and closing You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary the SmartKey. (Y page 68). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the mechanical key. 70 Doors Opening and closing Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 253). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 253). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. The vehicle is locked. Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. X The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary (Y page 68). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X You have lost a SmartKey. You have lost the mechanical key. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. The side windows cannot The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. be opened or closed X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary using the convenience (Y page 68). opening/closing feature. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Doors 71 When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 64). Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again. X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. The central locking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the stowage compartment in the center console. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked. X X Automatic locking feature Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. For example, you can unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. Z Opening and closing Unlocking and opening doors from the inside Trunk 72 To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore lock yourself out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 173). Opening and closing X Unlocking/locking the driver's door using the mechanical key i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using the mechanical key, begin by pressing the locking button for the interior locking mechanism while the driver's door is open. Then lock the driver's door using the mechanical key. To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 64). Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. ! Only close the trunk once the roof is lowered completely. Otherwise, you could damage the roof. If you close the trunk lid before the roof is lowered completely, the loading aid switch lights up and a warning tone sounds. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 295). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The trunk lid can be: Ropened/closed from outside Ropened automatically from outside Rlocked separately Ropened with the emergency release button Runlocked with the mechanical key You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Trunk 73 Opening/closing from outside Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Remove the mechanical key. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Press the % button on the SmartKey. Pull handle :. X Raise the trunk lid. X X Closing Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. Lock the vehicle if necessary using the & button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, it does not lock. X X Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 64). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 67). X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go. Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the trunk lid. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 67). X Turn the mechanical key from position 1 counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi- Z Opening and closing Opening Side windows 74 tion 2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid handle. The trunk is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. Opening and closing Emergency release for the trunk You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button. body becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: REmergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened REmergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed X Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If some- Side window reversing feature The front side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the upward movement of one of the front side windows during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows in the front The switches for the front side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the front-passenger door. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. Opening and closing all side windows Using the switch on the center console G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch down to open the side window again. You can use the switch on the center console to close all side windows simultaneously. X Open the cover in the lower center console. The switch for all side windows is under the cover. : Left ; Right Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the switch beyond the pressure point and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the pressure point and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the corresponding switch again. You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. X To open all side windows: press button : to the point of resistance. X To open all side windows fully: press switch : beyond the point of resistance. X To close all side windows: pull switch :. All side windows begin the closing procedure simultaneously. The rear side windows close after the front side windows. If, after opening the windows, you close one side window using the switch in the door control panel: Rthe front side window closes first and Rthen the corresponding rear side window closes. X Z Opening and closing Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. 75 Side windows 76 Opening and closing Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area when a side window is being closed. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: Release the recessed sensor surface on the door handle. X Immediately pull and hold the door handle and keep the door handle pulled. The side windows open. With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side windows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 75). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 75). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. X Problems with the side windows G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Roof Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature. The side windows cannot The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. be opened or closed X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary using the convenience (Y page 68). opening/closing feature. Roof Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely. G WARNING Closing the roof manually is a complicated and technically demanding procedure, which requires a lot of strength. You or others can become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Only have the soft top closed manually at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavy objects there. You will otherwise damage the roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle. ! Do not forget that the weather can change abruptly. Make certain that the roof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. ! When opening and closing the roof, make sure that: Rthere is sufficient clearance, as the roof swings upwards. Rthere is sufficient clearance behind the vehicle, as the trunk lid swings backwards beyond the bumper. Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the trunk partition. Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by the load. Rthe trunk partition is closed. Rthe trunk lid is closed. Rthe outside temperature is above 5 ‡ (Ò15 †). You could otherwise damage the roof, trunk and other parts of the vehicle. The vehicle dimensions for opening/closing the roof can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 295). Z Opening and closing X 77 78 Roof Make sure that the roof and rear window are clean and dry before opening the roof. Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk. Opening and closing Opening and closing using the roof switch Opening and closing Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button. For safety reasons, you can only open or close the roof when the vehicle is stationary. ! Operating the roof while pulling away: RObserve the following traffic carefully. RDo not drive faster than 25 mph (40 km/h). RAvoid abrupt braking and swerving maneu- vers. Do not operate the roof when cornering, driving on uneven surfaces or during strong winds. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. i If the traffic conditions mean that you have to drive off while opening/closing the roof, the procedure which was started while stationary can be continued at speeds of up to approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Vehicles without semi-automatic trunk partition: close the trunk partition (Y page 79). X Close the trunk lid (Y page 72). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the cover in the lower center console. Roof switch : is located under the cover. X To open: pull roof switch : until the entire roof is stowed away in the trunk. The Vario-Roof in Operation message appears in the multifunction display. Once the opening procedure is complete, the message disappears and a tone sounds. All of the side windows open. If you operate the roof switch and the Trunk Partition Open message appears in the multifunction display, the trunk partition is not closed correctly. X Close the trunk partition. X To close: press and hold soft-top switch : until the soft top is fully closed. The Vario-Roof in Operation message appears in the multifunction display. Once the opening procedure is complete, the message disappears and a tone sounds. All of the side windows open. X To close all side windows, pull the switch under the cover of the center console (Y page 75). X Roof Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button. Opening and closing This function is only available on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or with roof comfort operation. X Close the trunk lid (Y page 72). X Vehicles with comfort operation: point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey must be within 6 ft (2 m) of the vehicle. X To open: press and hold the % button on the SmartKey until the roof is fully opened. The roof and the rear side windows open. The front side windows close. X To interrupt the opening procedure: release the % button. X To open the front side windows: press the % button on the SmartKey again. X To close: press and hold the & button on the SmartKey until the roof is fully closed. The roof and the side windows close. X To interrupt the closing procedure: release the & button. Locking the roof again Always open or close the soft top completely. The roof is not locked if: Rthe K symbol and the Vario-Roof in Operation message appear in the multifunction display Rthe K symbol and the Open/Close Vario-Roof Completely message appear in the multifunction display and you hear a warning tone Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten seconds when pulling away or while driving Locking You can lock the roof again if it is not locked fully. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the roof switch (Y page 78). Trunk partition General notes ! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage when folding back the roof, you should: load the trunk to below the trunk partition Rnot place any objects on or in front of the trunk partition Rnot place any objects on the cover behind the roll bars Rnot allow the cargo to push the trunk partition upwards The trunk partition can be used to cover luggage and loads in the trunk. Ronly Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Z Opening and closing Opening/closing using the SmartKey 79 Roof 80 Opening and closing The wind screen offers protection from the wind when driving with the roof down. The wind screen can be installed or removed from the driver's side or passenger side. For operations involving the wind screen, it is preferable to be positioned on the side of the vehicle facing away from the traffic, after stopping the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Opening and closing Installing and removing the wind screen Preparing for installation To open: grip the handle of trunk partition :. X Press the release button in the handle of trunk partition :. Trunk partition : is unlocked. X Pull trunk partition : up out of the eyelets on the edge of the trunk. X Push trunk partition : forwards against the direction of the arrow by handle. X To close: pull back trunk partition : by the handle in the direction of the arrow and engage into the eyelets on the edge of the trunk on both sides. X Wind screen Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the wind screen in darkness or in other conditions offering poor visibility, your view to the rear is further impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the wind screen when visibility conditions are good. G WARNING If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it could detach itself during a journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Install the wind screen as described. ! Install or remove the wind screen only when the roof is open. You could otherwise damage the wind screen or the vehicle interior. : Wind screen ; Unlocked latch = Locked latch The following conditions must be fulfilled for installation: Runlocking buttons R and L point in the direction of travel. Rlatch ; facing you is unlocked. Rlatch = facing away from you is locked. X To unlock the latch: press unlocking button R or L on the locked latch. X To lock the latch: push the unlocked latch upward by hand until it engages. X Roof 81 Pull wind screen ; out of the bracket of the opposite roll bar in the direction of the arrow. X Secure wind screen ; to the trunk floor by the rubber strips (Y page 221). X Take the wind screen out of the trunk. Prepare for installing (Y page 80). X Hold wind screen : at an angle and slide it with locked latch = in the direction of arrow ? into the bracket of the opposite roll bar. X Press wind screen : down in the direction of arrow A until it engages. Make sure that studs B and latch ; fit into the respective brackets. X Check whether wind screen : is fully inserted into all four brackets and is sitting securely. X If this is not the case, remove wind screen : again and repeat the steps above. X X Removing AIRGUIDE Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle if you fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. Only fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is stationary. ! AIRGUIDE can only be positioned correctly by folding it in or out. AIRGUIDE cannot be dismantled. Do not try to remove AIRGUIDE from its anchorage. Otherwise, you could damage AIRGUIDE or the vehicle. AIRGUIDE can be folded out or back in from the driver's side or passenger side. When operating AIRGUIDE, preferably stand on the side of the vehicle away from the traffic, after you have stopped the vehicle in accordance with road and traffic conditions. X Press unlocking button L :. At the same time, pull wind screen ; up and tilt it. Z Opening and closing Installing Roof 82 Opening and closing Operating AIRGUIDE To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc : in the direction of the arrow towards the middle of the vehicle to the stop. X Repeat with disc ;. X To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs : and ; back behind the roll bar to the stop. Discs : and ; can also be used independently of each other, e.g. when you are driving without a passenger. X components will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. RNever remove the trim behind the overhead control panel. RIf the trim is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CONTROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The electrical components of MAGIC SKY CONTROL are protected by a paneling behind the overhead control panel. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit is marked with a yellow warning sticker that warns you of high voltage. The electric cables of the high-voltage section are color orange. Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL MAGIC SKY CONTROL General notes MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a panorama roof, the transparency of which can be changed by applying electrical voltage. MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched between darkened and transparent states. MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automatically after a short period when you turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock or remove the SmartKey. Risk of electric shock G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high voltage. If the trim behind the overhead control panel is damaged or removed, electrical Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the status it was set to before the engine was switched off. X To change the degree of transparency: press button :. X At temperatures below freezing, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time. Roof 83 Problems with the roof Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The roof will not open or The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged. close. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 79). The trunk lid is open. Close the trunk lid (Y page 73). The on-board voltage is too low. Leave the engine running. X The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has switched off automatically. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure. The automatic roof system is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z Opening and closing X Seats 84 Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 84). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. Manual seat adjustment. (Y page 86) Electrical seat adjustment. (Y page 86) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. X When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. X Observe the safety notes on steering column adjustment (Y page 88). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 88) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 89) When adjusting the steering wheel column, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 40). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 42). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 91) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (Y page 93). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Seats G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move forwards as far as the next catch during movement such as braking or abrupt changes of direction. As a result, you would be pushed against your seat belt by the unsecured driver's seat. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Before every journey, make sure that the driver's seat is fully engaged. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 43) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53). G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. ! To prevent damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following notes: RDo not spill liquids onto the seats. Dry the seats as soon as possible if liquid does get spilled on the seats. RIf the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. Also, do not use the seat heating to dry the seats. RClean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. RDo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place pointed objects on the seat cushions such as knives, nails or tools. Where possible, use the seats only for carrying passengers. RWhen operating the seat heating, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective covers, child seats or booster seats. RWhen the seat heating is switched on, the seat surface can be damaged as a result of objects being placed on the seats; for example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. 85 Seats 86 ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Adjusting the seats electrically i The head restraints are equipped with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 52). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the seats manually : ; = ? Backrest angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Seat cushion angle Seat height i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 93). Adjusting the head restraints Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: lift lever : and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release lever : again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X To adjust the backrest angle: relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Pull handle ; and move backrest to the desired angle. X Release handle ; again. The backrest must audibly engage. X X G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. To adjust the seat height: pull handle = upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. X To raise/lower: push the head restraint upwards or pull it down into the desired position. Seats 87 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support : ; = ? Raises the backrest contour Softens the backrest contour Lowers the backrest contour Hardens the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. ! When the seat heating is switched on, the seat surface can be damaged as a result of objects being placed on the seats; for example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz. When the seat heating is switched on, ensure that there are no objects on the seats. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Problems with the seat heating The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. X Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch on the seat heating again. AIRSCARF Setting head level heating (AIRSCARF) G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Driver's and front-passenger seat 88 Steering wheel This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. The AIRSCARF function warms the head and neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. The warm air flows out of the holes in the head restraints. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. X Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button :. Three red indicator lamps in the button light up. The blower starts up after a preheating phase of seven seconds. X Press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. i The blower continues running for seven sec- Adjusting the steering wheel manually i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF G WARNING If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. onds to cool down the heating elements. may switch off. Problems with AIRSCARF AIRSCARF has switched off prematurely or will not switch on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. X Switch on AIRSCARF again. Steering wheel 89 EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes and-aft adjustment) X Push release lever : down completely in the direction of the arrow. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING : Adjusts the steering wheel height ; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat and the steering wheel. and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT RStoring feature (Y page 89) settings (Y page 93) Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors : Release lever ; Adjusts the steering wheel height = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. 90 Mirrors Seats, steering wheel and mirrors If somebody becomes trapped: or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi- Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rpress one of the memory function memory buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving The adjustment process is stopped. cles with KEYLESS-GO When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering column is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 93). G WARNING Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If you use openings in the bodywork or detachable parts as steps, you could: If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 174). Rslip and/or fall the vehicle and cause yourself to Rdamage fall. There is a risk of injury. Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 174). Mirrors Rear-view mirror Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel swings up when you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position u or 1 i The steering wheel moves upwards only if it has not already reached the upper steering limiter. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when: Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. mirror using button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press button = up, down, to the right or to the left. The exterior mirror must be set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated after starting the vehicle if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10 minutes. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors manually by switching on the rear window defroster. G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left exterior mirror or button ; for the right exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior X Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 174): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and Z 91 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Mirrors 92 Mirrors then open the driver's or front-passenger door. i The exterior mirrors do not fold out if they have been folded in manually. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button until you hear the mirror click into place (Y page 91). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 91). The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position Using reverse gear Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. You can store the parking position of the frontpassenger-side exterior mirror using memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not be engaged during the process. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. Memory function You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. X Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb should be visible. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Select the front-passenger-side exterior mirror using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side X Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in smartphone" function is activated Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Using the memory button 93 Memory function 94 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors via the Mercedes me connect web app. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The memory function can be activated at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 86). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 89) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 91). X Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. X Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe light switch Rthe combination switch (Y page 96) Rthe on-board computer (Y page 172) Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp 4d If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door while the SmartKey is in position u in the ignition lock Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. à is the preferred light switch position: RThe light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray). RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. Canada only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you shift the automatic transmission from a driving position to position j the daytime running lamps or low-beam headlamps go out after 3 minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to the T position, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: Z Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting 95 96 Exterior lighting The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 172). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. Low-beam headlamps Lights and windshield wipers G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps ! If the battery charge is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T parking lamps over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or lefthand W standing lamps. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position u in the ignition lock. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Combination switch Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. : ; = ? High-beam headlamps Turn signal, right High-beam flasher Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X Exterior lighting Hazard warning lamps Cornering light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Cornering light function with traffic circle function: The cornering light function is activated on both sides before entering a traffic circle through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians crossing the road, for example, are illuminated by your vehicle in good time. Active light function To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists and animals sooner. Active: when the lights are switched on. Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active light function evaluates the course of the lane in which you are driving and pre-emptively controls the active light function. Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your Z Lights and windshield wipers To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X 97 98 Exterior lighting vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Important safety notes G WARNING Lights and windshield wipers Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. X X Replacing bulbs Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting 99 lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 173). Replacing bulbs Important safety notes G WARNING on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ? c Switches the interior lighting on/off Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time, unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color and brightness of the ambient lighting are set via the multimedia system (Y page 172). Automatic interior lighting control To switch on/off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior lighting is switched on for a set time when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition X Vehicles with halogen lamps Do not use a lamp that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The lamp may explode if: Ryou touch it is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Only replace the lamps listed (Y page 100). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing lamps, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new lamp still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Vehicles with LED headlamps The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified Rit Z Lights and windshield wipers Overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. Replacing bulbs 100 specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 100). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Push bar ; upwards. X Remove connector = with the bulb. X Pull the bulb out of connector =. X Insert the new bulb into connector = and place in the bracket of bar ;. Make sure that the bulb is positioned correctly. X Push bar ; downwards. X Attach housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 100). Lights and windshield wipers X Halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Changing the front bulbs Removing/mounting the cover in the front wheel housing High-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps) To remove: switch off the lights. Turn the front wheels inwards. X Slide cover : up and remove it. X To install: reinsert cover : and slide it down until it engages. X X X X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. Windshield wipers 101 Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards, disconnect it and pull it out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ; at the top, push it down and secure it in place. X Attach housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Due to their location, have the bulbs in the side marker lamp changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind- shield using washer fluid If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade Z Lights and windshield wipers Side marker lamps (halogen headlamps) Windshield wipers 102 and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always position the windshield wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windshield. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the hood. Press both release clips ;. Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = away from wiper arm ?. X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A. X X Installing the wiper blades Replacing the wiper blades Removing the wiper blades Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Set the windshield wiper to position °. X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood: turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey (Y page 116). X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. Lights and windshield wipers X Position new wiper blade : with recess B on lug A. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips ; engage in bracket ?. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Windshield wipers 103 Problems with the windshield wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. zles no longer hits the center of the windshield. Z Lights and windshield wipers The windshield wipers fail completely. 104 Overview of climate control systems Overview of climate control systems Climate control General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. i When the weather is warm, ventilate the vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most parti- cles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. Air-conditioning system control panel : ; = ? A B C D Canada only Sets the temperature (Y page 109) Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 112) Sets the air distribution (Y page 110) Defrosts the windshield (Y page 110) Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108) Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 112) Sets the airflow (Y page 110) Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 111) 105 Climate control Overview of climate control systems : ; = ? A B C D USA only Sets the temperature (Y page 109) Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 111) Sets the air distribution (Y page 110) Defrosts the windshield (Y page 110) Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108) Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 112) Sets the airflow (Y page 110) Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 111) Notes on using the air-conditioning system Air-conditioning system Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use the air-conditioning system optimally. RSwitch on cooling with air dehumidification using the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). R Recommendation for air distribution in winter: set the O and ¯ settings. Recommendation for air distribution in summer: set the P setting. ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. ROnly ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 120). 106 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control : ; = ? A B C D E F G H Canada only Sets the temperature, left (Y page 109) Defrosts the windshield (Y page 110) Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 110) Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108) Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 112) Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 111) Sets the temperature, right (Y page 109) Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 112) Sets the air distribution (Y page 110) Increases the airflow (Y page 110) Reduces the airflow (Y page 110) Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 108) Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 109) 107 Climate control Overview of climate control systems : ; = ? A B C D E F G H USA only Sets the temperature, left (Y page 109) Defrosts the windshield (Y page 110) Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 111) Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108) Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 111) Sets the temperature, right (Y page 109) Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 112) Sets the air distribution (Y page 110) Increases the airflow (Y page 110) Reduces the airflow (Y page 110) Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 108) Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 109) Optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control Climate control system The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your 3-zone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons or the Á button on the control panel of the climate control. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons or the Á button light up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. Operating the climate control systems 108 ECO start/stop function Climate control During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 120). Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating climate control General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly i Activate climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 109). Air-conditioning system Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To switch on: turn airflow control C clockwise to the desired position (except position 0) (Y page 104). X To switch off: turn airflow control C counter-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 104). X 3-zone automatic climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating To activate: press the ¿ or Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. X Operating the climate control systems 109 Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal¿ or Á button function. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on. Setting climate control to automatic Setting the temperature General notes Air-conditioning system Automatic mode is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To increase or reduce: turn control : clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 104). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). i If you turn control : counter-clockwise to the lowest temperature setting, air-recirculation mode may activate automatically, depending on the outside temperature. Automatic control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X To switch to manual mode: press the _ button. or X Press the I or K button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. X X 3-zone automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To increase or decrease: turn control : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 106). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). i If you turn controls : and B counterclockwise to the lowest temperature setting, air-recirculation mode may activate automatically, depending on the outside temperature. Climate control Problem Operating the climate control systems 110 Setting the air distribution Air-conditioning system Air-conditioning system Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ buttons. The corresponding indicator lamp lights up briefly. The following air distribution settings can be selected: ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To increase or reduce: turn control C clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 104). X Climate control Setting the airflow i You can also activate several air distribution settings simultaneously. To do this, press multiple air distribution buttons. The air is then directed through various vents. 3-zone automatic climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. The following air distribution settings can be selected: P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents b Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and side air vents (Canada only) a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs the airflow through the defroster vents, the center and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents (Canada only) X i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. You can only close the side air vents, by fully closing the adjuster on the side air vents (Y page 113). X 3-zone automatic climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To increase or reduce: press the K or I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control on vehicles for Canada. X To switch on: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. X To switch off: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Defrosting the windshield General notes You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again. Switching the "windshield defrosting" function on or off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To switch on: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. X Operating the climate control systems X or X To switch off: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. Dual-zone automatic climate control: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. MAX COOL maximum cooling The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA. MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running. X To activate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions: Rmaximum cooling Rmaximum airflow Rair-recirculation mode on Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside Activate the ¿ or Á cooling with air dehumidification function. X Dual-zone automatic air conditioning: activate the à mode button. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. X i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Windows fogged up on the outside Activate the windshield wipers. Air-conditioning system: press the P or O button. X Dual-zone automatic air conditioning: press the _ button until the P or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X X Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Climate control The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off 111 Operating the climate control systems 112 Problems with the rear window defroster Climate control Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumthe ¤ button flashes. ers are switched on. The rear window X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, defroster has deactivainterior lighting or the seat heating. ted prematurely or canWhen the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster not be activated. can be activated again. The roof is open. X Close the roof. When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can be activated again. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside General notes temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. i Air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution (dual-zone automatic climate control only) or at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. X Switching the residual heat on or off General notes The residual heat function is only available on vehicles for Canada. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 116). X To activate: press the Ì or Á button. The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button lights up. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. X Setting the air vents i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the Ì or Á button. The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button goes out. i For optimal climate control in the vehicle, open the air vents completely and set the adjusters to the central position. Setting the center air vents Climate control Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen Setting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To open the center air vents: turn the adjuster in one of center air vents : counterclockwise. X To close the center air vents: turn the adjuster in one of center air vents : clockwise until it engages. X Setting the side air vents G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. i You can move the adjusters for the air vents 113 : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in the side air vent ; to the left. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in the side air vent ; to the right until it engages. X vertically or horizontally to set the direction of the airflow. Z 114 Setting the air vents Climate control Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF vents : using the AIRSCARF button (Y page 87). Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper- ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. When using floormats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place several floormats or carpets on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Do not warm up the engine while stationary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. In vehicles with automatic transmission, engage positions P and R only when the vehicle is stationary. Z 115 Driving and parking Driving 116 Driving Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. Key positions Driving and parking SmartKey g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO start function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 65). Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can impair the functionality of the KEYLESS-GO key. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with KEYLESS-GO : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock Driving As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving (Y page 204). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is switched off again. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Roperate the vehicle's equipment. the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position j. Transmission position display j is shown in the multifunction display. X Z Driving and parking X Rrelease 117 118 Driving i You can start the engine in transmission position j and i. Driving and parking Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 116) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 116). The engine starts. Pulling away General notes You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 173). It is only possible to shift the transmission from position j to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the shift lock released. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 133). Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. G WARNING Hill start assist is not active if: If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Ryou ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient Rthe transmission is in position i Rthe electric parking brake is applied RESP® is malfunctioning ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. Automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops). The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button release the brake pedal in transmission position h or i and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear k Ryou move the transmission out of position j Ryou switch to drive program S+ Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low Shifting the transmission to position j does not start the engine. Ryou : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the transmission in h or i, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe hood is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened Z 119 Driving and parking Driving 120 Driving Driving and parking Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function X To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 148) or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 146). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to position u in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 117). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. RThere The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 253). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. DYNAMIC SELECT button Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical smoothly and is misfircomponent of the engine management system. ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently. above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to The coolant warning cool down. lamp may also be on and X Check the coolant level (Y page 235). Observe the warning notes a warning tone may as you do so and add coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. DYNAMIC SELECT button Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension or the adaptive adjustable damping (only on vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension) Rthe sound of the exhaust system (vehicles with sports exhaust system) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 117). Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After a short period of time, the display goes out and the symbol for the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the multimedia system display. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any X Z Driving and parking Problem 121 122 Automatic transmission Driving and parking drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display. In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive program C is recommended. Available drive programs: C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics I Individual Individual settings E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics Selector lever Overview of transmission positions ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is in motion, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from h to k, from k to h or directly to j. Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission position h or k, otherwise park position j is engaged automatically. The transmission could be damaged. Additional information for drive programs (Y page 125). Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. j k i h Park position Reverse gear Neutral Drive The selector lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position j, k, i or h is shown in the transmission position display in the multifunction display. Transmission position and drive program display All vehicles (except for Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) : Transmission position ; Gear = Drive program Automatic transmission The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG SLC 43 123 Engaging reverse gear R ! Only move the automatic transmission to k when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the brake and keep it pressed. Push the selector lever forwards past the first point of resistance. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 119). X : Transmission position ; Drive program The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. Engaging park position P Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. Rstart When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Press button :. X Engaging park position P automatically Park position j is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position j if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 148) and on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 144). When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the selector lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically. With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically. X Z Driving and parking X Automatic transmission Driving and parking 124 If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Engage neutral i. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Transmission positions B Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position B (Y page 122) when the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock, the transmission is locked. The automatic transmission shifts to B automatically: Rwhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock Rwhen the engine is switched off with the transmission in position C or 7 and one of the doors is opened In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position B. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position C when the vehicle is stationary. Engaging drive position D When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the selector lever back past the first point of resistance. X Automatic transmission Neutral Do not shift the transmission to A while driving. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position A if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Coasting in neutral i may cause damage to the drive train. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts through the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position h. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Drive programs Drive program C (Comfort) In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive program C is recommended. Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rthe suspension exhibits comfortable damping settings (adaptive damping system only in vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension). Rthe steering exhibits comfortable steering characteristics. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Z Driving and parking A 125 126 Automatic transmission Rthe suspension exhibits firm damping settings (vehicles with adaptive damping system or AMG sports suspension). Rthe steering exhibits sporty steering characteristics. Driving and parking Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm damping settings (vehicles with adaptive damping system or AMG sports suspension). Rthe steering exhibits sporty steering characteristics. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Rthe Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with adaptive damping system or AMG sports suspension) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rthe suspension exhibits comfortable damping settings (vehicles with adaptive damping system or AMG sports suspension). Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnected from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (coasting mode). Rthe steering exhibits comfortable steering characteristics. Manual gear shifting General notes You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position h to do this. Depending on which steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. To use manual shifting, you have two options: Rtemporary setting Rpermanent setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position h. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. Temporary setting Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. X X To activate: shift the selector lever to h. Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;. The temporary setting is active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions, the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during overrun mode or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ; and hold it in place. or X Use the lever to switch the transmission position. or X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Permanent setting If the maximum engine speed in the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting. If the engine were to exceed the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Mercedes-AMG SLC 43 ! If manual gearshifting is permanently acti- X To activate: shift the selector lever to h. Press button :. X To deactivate: press button :. X vated, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Shifting gears All vehicles (except for Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting. If the engine were to exceed the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the auto- X X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Z 127 Driving and parking Automatic transmission 128 Automatic transmission matic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Shift recommendation Driving and parking All vehicles (except for Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Kickdown For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters. If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. X The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Mercedes-AMG SLC 43 Refueling 129 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only partly possible to engage the gears, or the transmission is in The transmission no lon- position i. ger changes gear. X Stop the vehicle. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position h or k. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. Z Driving and parking Problems with the transmission 130 Refueling ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the = Tire pressure table ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted Switch the engine off. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. fuel system. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Driving and parking ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 291). Refueling General information The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Opening the fuel filler flap X X Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. The ; Check Engine warning lamp may also light up. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 192). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 207). : To open the fuel filler flap ; Insert the fuel filler cap Parking 131 Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 65). The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 67). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rshift When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position j. Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Switching off the engine G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehiZ Driving and parking G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the SmartKey immediately to position u in the ignition lock (Y page 116) and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking 132 cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the transmission to position j (Y page 123). X With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button (Y page 116). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. If the driver's door is closed, this is the same as SmartKey position 1. If the driver's door is open, this is the same as SmartKey position u (Y page 116). X Driving and parking X The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/ stop automatic engine switch-off function. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position j. X It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. Applying or releasing manually Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X To engage: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is engaged, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed. To release: pull handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 116) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button X Applying automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position j and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle :. The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if: RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Releasing automatically The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running Rthe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle Rthe transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or shift from position j to h or k Rif the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed If the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou move the transmission out of position j or you have previously driven at a speed above 2 mph (3 km/h) Rif the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed When the electric parking brake is released, the ! indicator lamp goes out in the instrument cluster. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake. The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle of the electric parking brake is pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Release Parking Brake message appears Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged. Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Z 133 Driving and parking Parking 134 Driving tips Driving tips General notes Important safety notes Driving and parking G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: RThe tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RObserve the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or in the service interval dis- play. Have all the maintenance work carried in accordance with Daimler AG regulations. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the MercedesBenz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Driving tips The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration ; : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Fuel Low message is shown in the multifunction display instead of range ?. The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up (Y page 207). Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking = Constant (continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. Z Driving and parking ECO display 135 Driving and parking 136 Driving tips In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: Rload Rtire pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Ractive electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E. In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive program C is recommended. On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 167). Further information on the ECO display (Y page 166). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long, steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes. To use engine braking, shift to a lower gear in good time. This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively. When making use of the engine braking effect, it is possible that a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. in the case of suddenly changing or slippery road surface conditions. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. This also applies if you have activated cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You then have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. ! As the ESP® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition must be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position u or 1 in the ignition lock), if the electric parking brake is tested on a braking dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds). Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may cause severe damage to the brake system. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 57). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance brake system (except Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads and have components with corresponding properties. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: RSpeed RBraking force RAmbient conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain more information on this from a qualified specialist workshop. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly. Z 137 Driving and parking Driving tips 138 Driving systems Driving on wet roads Driving and parking Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed Ravoid ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Driving on flooded roads ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water could enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. It can then damage the engine's or automatic transmission's electronic components. It can also be sucked in by the engine's air intake connection and cause engine damage. Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position i. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 262). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 262). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 262). Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady Driving systems speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Important safety notes Storing and maintaining a speed If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. X Cruise control lever Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing or calling up a speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. last stored speed = Stores the current speed or a lower speed ? Deactivating cruise control When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. The speed is then permanently displayed in the status indicator together with the ¯ symbol. On vehicles with a segment ring in the speedometer, the segments from the currently saved speed to the end of the segment ring light up. Setting a speed G WARNING Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and Z Driving and parking X X : Stores the current speed or a higher speed ; Storing the current speed or calling up the 139 Driving systems 140 legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. Driving and parking X i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards : . or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: engage the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high, and as a result the engine speed is too low RBrake Assist intervenes Ryou move out of transmission position h If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC General notes Distance Assist DISTRONIC regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance from the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to maintain the designated distance from the vehicle in front. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects that there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, you will be warned visually and audibly. Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. For Distance Assist DISTRONIC to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. Distance Assist DISTRONIC operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Driving systems i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Important safety notes G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Roncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC warns you. G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident. Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action. ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Z Driving and parking Do not use Distance Assist DISTRONIC on roads with steep gradients. As Distance Assist DISTRONIC transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. 141 Driving and parking 142 Driving systems Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand lane Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand lane If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever Cruise control lever : Stores the current speed or a higher speed ; Setting a specified minimum distance = Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed ? Stores the current speed or a lower speed A Switching off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Important safety notes ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. RParking Pilot must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position h. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from j to h or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid. Driving systems Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, up : or down ; . Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; to the pressure point for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. or X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; past the pressure point for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the Distance Pilot Suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Pulling away and driving If you want to pull away with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated: accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise control. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slowermoving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a fastermoving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. X Selecting the drive program Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or S+ drive program (Y page 121). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. Z Driving and parking Activating X 143 144 Driving systems Driving and parking Changing lanes If when driving on multilane roads you wish to change to the overtaking lane, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When you change lanes, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC monitors the left lane (on lefthand-drive vehicles) or the right lane (on righthand-drive vehicles). Stopping G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is switched off using the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Further information on deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 146). If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position j if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may also shift to position j automatically. Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. Driving systems You can set the specified minimum distance for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on the vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 145). The specified minimum distance can be changed while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is switched on or off. Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, one or more segments ; in the set speed range light up. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. Cruise control lever Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated To increase: turn control = toward ;. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = toward :. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Your vehicle X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 170). Z Driving and parking Setting a specified minimum distance 145 Driving systems 146 Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Driving and parking i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable = Your vehicle ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 170). You will initially see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. X Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in position j, k or i Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door is open Ryou activate Parking Pilot Rthe vehicle has skidded If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The Distance Pilot Off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Tips for driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is then switched off. Cruise control lever There are several ways to deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the Distance Pilot Off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend Driving systems Vehicles traveling on a different line Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lanes Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is revealed, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them. Crossing vehicles Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC under the following conditions, the vehicle could pull away unintentionally: Rat traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example Rif there is a vehicle in front after a crossing with the HOLD function activated Z Driving and parking Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. 147 148 Driving systems HOLD function Driving and parking General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Important safety notes Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated Activating the HOLD function G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 148). Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou depress the accelerator and the transmission is in position h or k. Ryou shift the transmission to position j. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is automatically shifted to position j if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, the transmission may also be shifted into position j automatically. Adaptive damping system General notes i Mercedes-AMG SLC 43: the adaptive damping system is called AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension. A suspension with the adaptive damping system provides improved driving comfort and continuously controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping characteristics adapt to the current operating and driving situation. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface conditions Rthe selected drive program (Y page 121). Selecting the Comfort or Economy drive programs In the Comfort and Economy drive programs, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select one of these drive programs if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Also select these drive programs when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive program C is recommended. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : repeatedly until the Comfort or Economy drive program is selected. Selecting Sport mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the Sport drive program is selected. Selecting Sport Plus mode The firmer suspension settings in the Sport Plus drive program ensure even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads or, ideally, when driving on closed race circuits. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : repeatedly until the Sport Plus drive program is selected. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Important safety notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually and audibly indicates the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that there Z 149 Driving and parking Driving systems 150 Driving systems are no persons, animals or objects in the path of your vehicle when you are maneuvering or parking. Driving and parking ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position h, k or i Rrelease the electric parking brake Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 242). Range Range of the sensors General notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Minimum distance : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. In addition, warning tones are issued. When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient, you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter the frequency of the intermittent warning tones becomes. When the minimum distance is reached, you hear a continuous warning tone. Deactivating or activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located between the roll bars. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Automatic transmission: : Deactivates or activates Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp If indicator lamp ; lights up, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deactivated. i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati- cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Transmission posi- Warning display tion h Front area activated k, i or the vehicle Rear and front areas is rolling backwards activated j No areas activated Z 151 Driving and parking Driving systems 152 Driving systems Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactithe Parking Assist vated. PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop. hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or malfunctioning. the Parking Assist X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 242). PARKTRONIC warning X Switch the ignition back on. displays are lit. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultradeactivated after sound waves. approximately five secX Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC functions in a different onds. location. Parking Guidance Important safety notes Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. You receive steering instructions when parking. You can also still use Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 149). Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area when you are maneuvering or parking. G WARNING If objects are located above or below the detection range, Active Parking Assist may steer too early. This could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use Active Parking Assist in these types of situation. ! If they cannot be avoided, drive over obsta- cles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. If Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Guidance is also unavailable. Parking Guidance may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: Rparallel to the direction of travel Ron straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat curbs Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately Rpay attention to the Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning messages during the parking procedure (Y page 151) Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Parking Guidance Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow chains or an emergency spare wheel fitted Rmake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct effect on the steering instructions Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure with Parking Guidance. Detecting parking spaces parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right = or the left : also appears. Parking Guidance only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on until you have engaged reverse gear. Parking Guidance will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking Moving the vehicle into the stop position Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position k. The multifunction display shows the Be Aware of Obstacles Near the Vehicle Press 'OK' to Confirm message. X : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see X Press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm. The multifunction display switches to Parking Guidance. Z 153 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 154 Depending on your distance from the parking space, the Please Drive Backward message will appear in the multifunction display. Driving and parking X If necessary, reverse towards the parking space. This is indicated by an arrow pointing backwards. Continue backing up until you hear a tone. Stop – the stop position has been reached. The arrow is white. The Please Steer Wheel to the Right or Please Steer Wheel to the Left message appears in the multifunction display. Backing up into the parking space different direction and then change gear. In this case, further displays in the multifunction display will direct you to the final position. X X Maneuver if necessary. Always observe the warning messages displayed by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 151). Canceling Parking Guidance Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center console (Y page 151). Parking Guidance is immediately canceled and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off. Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. The parking space symbol goes out and a warning tone sounds. X Rear view camera General notes While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X To back up into a parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and back up carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. The Please Steer Wheel to the Right or Please Steer Wheel to the Left message appears in the multifunction display. X To countersteer: while the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X To back up into a parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and back up carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, Stop as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. The Parking Guidance Finished message appears in the multifunction display and a tone sounds. You may be asked to steer in a X Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text shown in the multimedia system display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera displays in the multimedia system. Driving systems Important safety notes i The contrast of the display may be affected by the sudden presence of sunlight or other light sources, e.g. when exiting a garage. Pay particular attention in this situation. i If usability is severely restricted, e.g. due to pixel errors, have the display repaired or replaced. i The rear view camera is protected from rain- drops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 242). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated. Activating/deactivating the rear view camera To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the Digital Owner's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you drive forwards a short distances or shift the transmission to j. The inner segments of the warning indicator are displayed in red if there is a complete system failure. The indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. If the rear system fails: Rthe rear segments are displayed in red when reversing Rthe rear segments are not displayed when driving forwards X Displays in the multimedia system The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Rthe Z Driving and parking The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area when you are maneuvering or parking. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 242) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines, depending on technical conditions. 155 156 Driving systems Driving and parking Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. : Front warning display ; Additional measurement operational readi- : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without steering input – vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ness indicator for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC = Rear warning display Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 150), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system. "Reverse parking" function Backing up straight into a parking space without steering input A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position k. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. : White guide line without steering input – vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems 157 imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 155). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Reverse perpendicular parking with steering input : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 155). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Maintain the steering input and reverse carefully. : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. : White guide line at the current steering input ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary. : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without steering input = End of parking space Z Driving and parking = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Driving systems 158 X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Driving and parking 180° view : Symbol for the 180° view function ; Your vehicle = Warning displays for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC You can also use the rear view camera to select a 180° view. When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 150), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays = light up in the multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly. ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length of journey The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than 112 mph (180 km/h) Rif you are currently using COMAND or making a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. Warning and display messages in the multifunction display Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 171). If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the ATTEN‐ TION ASSIST: Take a Break! message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a or % button to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break X Driving systems Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 159) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 161). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for Z Driving and parking When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display. Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in the multimedia system. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system. 159 Driving and parking 160 Driving systems Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist (Y page 171) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X Driving systems General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function (Y page 172), Lane Keeping Assist is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Rnot G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road Switching on Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 171). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 170) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Z Driving and parking Lane Keeping Assist 161 162 Driving systems Driving and parking Standard If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP® Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP® Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown Ryou brake hard Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou cut the corner on a bend Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 32). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 32). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If you turn the light switch (Y page 95) to the Ã, T or L position, the brightness will depend upon the brightness of the ambient light. The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 138): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated (Y page 140): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 165). A change in the outside temperature is shown in the multifunction display after a delay. Z 163 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation 164 Displays and operation Coolant temperature gauge On-board computer and displays G WARNING Operating the on-board computer Overview Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. ! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. The coolant temperature gage is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32). The H marking in the coolant temperature gauge corresponds to a coolant temperature of approximately 248 ‡ (120 †). Under normal operating conditions and at the correct coolant level, the coolant temperature gauge may rise to the H marking. : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. X Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar RScrolls in lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects 9 : Press and hold: RIn the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range, selects an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open a RConfirms % Press briefly: Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system: you can find further information on the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions. Multifunction display the selection or display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RBack RSwitches off voice-operated control for navigation or the Voice Control System RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ~ RRejects 6 RMakes W X RAdjusts 8 RMute ? RSwitches or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches the volume on voice-operated control for navigation or the Voice Control System You can find further information on voice-operated control for navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions in vehicles with an Audio 20 multimedia system. Drive program (Y page 122) Transmission position (Y page 122) Text field Menu bar Time Outside temperature or speed (Y page 172) Set the time using the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. X To display menu bar ?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. Possible displays in the multifunction display: : ; = ? A B RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 128) Rj Parking Guidance (Y page 152) RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 138) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 98) Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 118) Rë HOLD function (Y page 148) Z 165 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation Menus and submenus 166 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Menu overview Using the = or ; button on the steering wheel, open the menu bar. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 164). Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menu: RTrip menu (Y page 166) instructions) RNavi menu (navigation (Y page 167) RAudio menu (Y page 168) menu (telephone) (Y page 169) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 170) RServ. menu (Y page 171) RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 172) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) (Y page 175) RTel Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears. = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From Start or From Reset. X The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 167). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset. ECO display Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 135). X Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the display with approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving X : Distance ; Driving time Menus and submenus Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. A gearshift recommendation Z may also appear in the display. Observe the information on gearshift recommendation when shifting manually (Y page 128). Mercedes-AMG SLC 43: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display and not in the digital speedometer display. X Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. Observe the additional information on navigation in the Digital Operator's Manual of the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. Route guidance not active : Direction of travel ; Current road Resetting values Route guidance active Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a to confirm your selection. X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset. No change of direction announced X : ; = ? Distance to destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road "Follow the road's course" symbol Z On-board computer and displays style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C appears instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. 167 On-board computer and displays 168 Menus and submenus Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Other status indicators of the navigation system : Road into which the change of direction The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. Possible displays: leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see change-of-direction symbol = and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation RNew Route... or Calculating Route... A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. : Active station list ; Station frequency with memory position The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on the multimedia system and select radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until Menus and submenus SIRIUS XM® satellite radio acts like a normal radio. For more information on radio operation, see "Satellite radio" in the Digital Operator's Manual. Operating an audio player or audio media Switch on the multimedia system and select video DVD (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : appears. X Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system and select CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital Owner's Manual). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track : appears. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. Video DVD operation If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions). X Switch on the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual) X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system (Y page 215). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Z On-board computer and displays the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown. X To select a station: briefly press 9 or :. 169 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 170 Accepting a call Redialing If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time regardless of the menu selected. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. Rejects or ends a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Authorize access to the phone book on the phone. X Press : or 9 to select the names one after the other. or X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than one second. The names in the phone book are displayed quickly one after the other. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. X Assistance menu Introduction Depending on your vehicle's equipment, in the DriveAssist menu, you have the following options: RDisplaying the assistance graphic (Y page 170) RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist (Y page 171) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 171) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist (Y page 171) RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 171) Displaying the assistance graphic Menus and submenus Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist You can use this function to activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brake Assist. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 58). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. X Press a to confirm your selection. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 158). X Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. X Press a to confirm your selection. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. Further information on Blind Spot Assist (Y page 159). X Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keeping Assist. X Press a to confirm your selection. The current selection appears. X Press a again. X Press : or 9 to set Off, Standard or Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. Further information on Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 161). X Service menu Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu: RCalling up display messages (Y page 178) RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 267) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 267) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 237) Z On-board computer and displays Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Assist. Graphic. X Press a to confirm your selection. The multifunction display shows the Distance Assist DISTRONIC distance display in the assistance graphic display. The assistance graphic shows you the status of and/or information from other driving systems or driving safety systems: RDistance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 140) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 58) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 158) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 161) X 171 172 Menus and submenus Settings menu On-board computer and displays Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, in the Sett. menu you have the following options: RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 172) RChanging the light settings (Y page 172) RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 173) RChanging the convenience settings (Y page 174) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 175) Instrument cluster Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function. The current setting km or miles appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Rthe odometer and trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RDistance Assist DISTRONIC RASSYST PLUS service interval display Selecting permanent display The Permanent Display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed. The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent Display: function. The current setting, Outside Temperature or Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer [mph], appears. X To change the setting: press a again. X Lights Setting the daytime running lamps This function is not available in Canada. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on daytime running lamps (Y page 95). Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. Light +/- function. The current setting appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Setting the ambient lighting color Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. Light Col. function. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set the color to SOLAR, SOLAR Orange or SOLAR Red. X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switchoff Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Surround Lighting function. If the Surround Lighting function is activated, the multifunction display shows the light cone and the area around the vehicle in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Deactivating exterior lighting delayed switch-off temporarily: X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. Exterior lighting delayed switch-off is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround Lighting function and you turn the light switch to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and auto- matic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 95). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: Rparking lamps Rlow-beam headlamps Rdaytime running lamps Rside marker lamps Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Interior Lighting Delay function. When the Interior Lighting Delay function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. Z 173 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus 174 Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic Door Lock function. When the Automatic Door Lock function is activated, the multifunction display shows the left-hand vehicle door in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. On-board computer and displays X For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 71). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/ Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the multifunction display shows the steering wheel in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 89). Comfort For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 42). Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. Switching the seat belt adjustment on/off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt Adjustment function. When the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function. This function is only available in Canada. When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror Folding function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 91), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Restoring the factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes and confirmed, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) Warm-up : ; = ? A B X Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Transmission oil temperature Engine and transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. SETUP : Engine mode Eco/Comfort/Sport/ Sport +/Manual ; Steering Comfort/Sport = ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling mode Sport SETUP displays the following information, functions and settings: Rthe digital speedometer Rthe gear indicator Rthe engine mode Rthe steering setting Rthe setting of the ECO start/stop function Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears. RACE TIMER Displaying and starting RACE TIMER The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Z 175 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus 176 On-board computer and displays Stopping the RACE TIMER : Lap ; RACE TIMER You can start the RACE TIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACE TIMER appears. X To start: press the a button to start the RACE TIMER. Displaying the intermediate time X X Press the % button on the steering wheel. Confirm Yes with a. The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to position 3 and then press a to confirm Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap Stop the RACE TIMER. Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". X X Deleting all laps Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time appears for five seconds. X Starting a new lap : RACE TIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐ ish Lap. If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Display messages : ; = ? A RACETIMER overall evaluation Total time driven Average speed Distance covered Maximum speed If you save at least one lap and then stop RACETIMER, an overall evaluation is available. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears. = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Lap statistics : Lap ; Lap time Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 148) RParking (Y page 131) Z On-board computer and displays Overall statistics 177 Display messages 178 Hiding display messages Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. On-board computer and displays X Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Display messages 179 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily not available. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z On-board computer and displays Safety systems On-board computer and displays 180 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Turn On the Igni‐ tion to Release the Parking Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. F (USA only) ! (Canada The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 132). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. only) Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually. ing Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 132). F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Z 181 On-board computer and displays Display messages 182 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X or X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 132). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 281). X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X X Shift the transmission to position j. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 132). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position j, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake Inop‐ erative The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 183 184 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ tive See Operator's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RThe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Active Brake Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Restart the engine. Check Brake Pad Wear Inoperative Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Man‐ ual X Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Man‐ ual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: RDirt on sensors RHeavy rain or snow RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable: RActive Brake Assist RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Switch off the engine. X Clean all sensors (Y page 242). X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. 6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Ser‐ vice Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38). 6 Front Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 185 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 186 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The left or right head bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey, although: bag Disabled See Operator's Manual Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may not be triggered in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and frontpassenger knee bag (Y page 46) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 46). Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 187 188 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey, even though: bag Enabled See Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the frontpassenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 46) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 46). Lights Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The corresponding bulb is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 99). LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. Check Left Low Beam (Example) b Active Headlamps Inoperative X The active light function is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to position Ã. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator's Manual Auto Lamp Function Inoperative Switch Off Lights Z 189 On-board computer and displays Display messages 190 Display messages On-board computer and displays Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Man‐ ual ? ? Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 235). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The fan motor is malfunctioning. If the coolant temperature gage is below the H marking (Y page 164), drive on to the next qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. X The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature gage is below the H marking (Y page 164). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gage, observing the warning notes (Y page 235). X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and at the correct coolant level, the coolant temperature gage may rise to the H marking (Y page 164). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics See Operator's Man‐ ual ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X # The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 234). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 235). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you need to add engine oil more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X 4 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) Mercedes-AMG SLC 43: The engine oil level is too low. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 234). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 235). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you need to add engine oil more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X Z 191 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 192 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Mercedes-AMG SLC 43: The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 234). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 235). Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off 8 Fuel Level Low C 8 Gas Cap Loose The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Refuel at the nearest gas station. X There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. X The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Ø Check additive See Owner's Manual Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The DEF tank is empty. X Have DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Ø A warning tone also sounds. The DEF system is still malfunctioning. If you switch off the engine, the engine will not restart. Remaining starts: 10 X Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Ø The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. Have DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workRemaining starts: 16 shop. X Display messages 193 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. Attention Assist: Take a Break! À Attention Assist Inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 148). Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Clean the windshield. Off Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z On-board computer and displays Driving systems On-board computer and displays 194 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RFunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Clean the sensors (Y page 242). X Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance Inoperative Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 152). X Restart the engine. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance Canceled Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are: RThe vehicle is skidding. RThe sensors are dirty. RA malfunction has occurred. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 152). If the multifunction display does not show the parking space symbol at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Clean the sensors (Y page 242). X Restart the engine. If the multifunction display still does not show the parking space symbol at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer following the recommended path. X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in the multifunction display. Parking Guidance Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Distance Pilot Off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 140). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. Distance Pilot Now Available Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 140). Distance Pilot Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ ual Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RThe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Restart the engine. Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Distance Pilot Sus‐ pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot - - mph A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met. X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 140). Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (Y page 138). Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 195 On-board computer and displays 196 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise Control - - mph Cruise control cannot be activated, since not all of the activation conditions have been met. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 138). Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 246). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 267). Rthey Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 267). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Run Flat Indicator Inoperative Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Please Correct Tire Pressure USA only: The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 267). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 270). Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 246). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 267). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rthey Warning Tire Mal‐ function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 246). Ryou Z 197 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 198 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavaila‐ ble Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved. TirePress. Sen‐ sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position k or h. X Shift the transmission to position j or i. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' You have attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or i without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i To Shift out of P or N, Depress Brake into another transmission position with the engine switched off. and Switch on Engine X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine. Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehi‐ cle Rolling Away The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X When parking the vehicle, shift the transmission to position j. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only Select Park (P) When Vehicle is Stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position j. Apply Brake to Select R Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer You have attempted to shift from position h to position k. Depress the brake pedal. X Shift the transmission to position k. X You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position h is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position h. If position k, i or j is selected: X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Possi‐ You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to a malfuncble Service Required tion. Transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components. A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to position i. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cool‐ ing The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, always shift the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Z 199 On-board computer and displays Display messages 200 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages N M Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The trunk lid is open. Close the trunk lid. X The hood is open. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Close the hood. C Ð Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all the doors. X The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. J The trunk partition is open or the trunk is loaded too high. X Stow the load such that the trunk partition can close unhindered Trunk Partition Open and is not pushed upwards. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 80). Phone No Service K Decrease Speed K Vario-Roof Lowering Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the roof (Y page 78). X The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depressurized. X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 78). Display messages K Open/Close VarioRoof Completely K Start Engine See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The roof is not locked. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Push or pull and hold the roof switch until the roof is fully open or closed (Y page 78). X The on-board voltage is too low. Start the engine. X After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 78). X The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 78). Close Rear Side Win‐ You leave the vehicle and at least one rear side window is open. dows X Close the side windows (Y page 75). ¥ Check Washer Fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 236). Wiper Malfunction‐ ing X Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐ tioning The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. SmartKey Display messages  Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  Take Your Key from Ignition  Obtain a New Key Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. Use the correct SmartKey. X The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. Remove the SmartKey. X The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 201 On-board computer and displays 202 Warning and indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the battery (Y page 68).  The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The multifunction display shows the display message a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.  The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Locate the SmartKey. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Replace Key Battery Don't Forget Your Key Key Not Detected (red display message) Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.  Key Not Detected (white display message) The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X  Remove 'Start' But‐ ton and Insert Key Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. The SmartKey is continually undetected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator Warning and indicator lamps 203 Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Z On-board computer and displays and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving. 204 Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays Safety systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J ÷å ! N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 61) it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 60). ÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 205 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays 206 Warning and indicator lamps Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 61) it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 60). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. M N Only Mercedes-AMG SLC 43: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 61). F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38). Warning and indicator lamps 207 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Engine On-board computer and displays 208 Warning and indicator lamps Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 235). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gauge is below the H marking (Y page 164). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant temperature gauge has exceeded the H marking (Y page 164). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 235). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. Warning and indicator lamps N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the coolant temperature gauge is below the H marking (Y page 164), drive on to the next qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. X Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 140). Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 58). Z On-board computer and displays Warning/ indicator lamp 209 210 Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays Tires Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac- tion. driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 246). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 267). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rthe h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. General notes The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Rstop Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs). G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Z 211 Multimedia system Function restrictions Operating system 212 Operating system Overview General notes Multimedia system ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely. Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the q control knob. Adjusting the volume Turn the q control knob. The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during an active call X Switching the sound on or off X Press the 8 button on the control panel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted. Functions The multimedia system has the following functions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card RCommunication functions RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND) RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned 3 Rslid left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7 Back button You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the main menu of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the main menu: press the % button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the main menu of the current operating mode. Operating system You can assign predefined functions using the g favorites button and call them up by pressing the button (Y page 213). Favorites Calling up and exiting favorites To call up: press the g button on the controller. X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle. The favorites are displayed. X To exit: press the g button again. X Adding favorites Adding predefined favorites Press the g button. COMAND: slide 6 the controller. X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller. The menu bar is displayed. X Select Reassign. The categories are displayed. X Select a category. The favorites are displayed. X Select a favorite. X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired position, turn and press the controller. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the controller. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Adding your own favorites You can add climate control as a favorite, for example. X Select VehicleQVehicle Settings. X Press and hold the g button until the favorites are displayed. X Add a favorite to the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Navigation mode Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. General notes Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: Select NaviQNavigation. The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select OptionsQRoute Settings. Notes for route types: X REco Route Traffic Route RDynamic Z Multimedia system Favorites button 213 Operating system Multimedia system 214 Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in all countries). RDynamic TRF. Route After Request You can decide whether or not current traffic reports should be included in the route calculation (not available in all countries). RCalculate Alternative Routes Different routes are being calculated. In order to do so, instead of Start, select the menu item Continue. X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options. X Select a route option. Notes for route options: Select the location. If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are different ZIP codes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayed with an X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu. Further options for destination entry: X Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle: (only available in the USA) Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes. Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated. for a keyword The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates Entering an address Calculating the route Multimedia system: Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue. The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or Set as Intermediate Destination. Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list. RUse Select NaviQNavigation. The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Rstate/province, city or ZIP code Rcity or ZIP code, center Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection X Select City. The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out. X Enter the city. The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide 5 the controller. X Rsearch Connecting a mobile phone (COMAND) Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Multimedia system: Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ tingsQActivate Bluetooth. X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mail i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: X Select Tel/®QConn. DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart Search. The available mobile phones are displayed. Symbols in the device list Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorized. Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected. Connecting a mobile phone Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system. X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization. Z 215 Multimedia system Operating system Operating system 216 Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): Multimedia system Bluetooth® Select the name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey. X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20) Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone depending on use of one-telephone mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. In two-telephone mode you can use all the functions of the multimedia system with the main telephone. With the additional telephone, you can receive incoming calls. Multimedia system: Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ tingsQActivate Bluetooth. X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information is transmitted after you connect the main telephone: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mail i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: X Select Tel/®QConn. DeviceQCon‐ nect New Device. X Select Connect via Vehicle. X Select mobile phone. Connecting a mobile phone One-telephone mode: select Connect as New Main Phone. X Two-telephone mode: select Connect as Additional Phone when a mobile phone is already connected. X Operating system Symbols in the device manager The symbols are shown in color depending on their use. Symbol Explanation Mobile phone connected to the multimedia system Main telephone with full range of functions Additional telephone for incoming calls in two telephone mode Media mode General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the appropriate media mode must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) (Y page 218) RCD RDVD (COMAND) RSD cards Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Selecting using the device list Multimedia system: Select MediaQDevices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the media source. Playable files are played. X Inserting/removing an SD card Important safety notes G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card. Inserting an SD card The SD card slot is located on the control panel. X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face down. Removing an SD card Press the SD card. The SD card is ejected. X Remove the SD card. X Z Multimedia system Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization. or X Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit number sequence which you have chosen yourself into the passkey input menu. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X 217 Operating system 218 Multimedia system Connecting USB devices Connect the USB device to the USB port. There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Select the media source (Y page 217). X Stowage areas 219 Stowage areas Stowage spaces Important safety notes If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it to position 2. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it to position 1. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest Glove box X To open: push button : up and raise armrest ;. The stowage compartment can be locked and unlocked centrally using the SmartKey (Y page 65). i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it engages. X port and a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 Player . The glove box flap contains brackets for coins, pens, and credit and service cards. Z Stowage and features G WARNING Stowage areas 220 Eyeglasses compartment Stowage and features X To open: press marking :. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the center console To open: briefly press the lower section of cover :. X To remove the insert: pull the left-hand side of the insert up and out. X To install the insert: press the insert into the housing. X To close: fold cover : downwards until it engages. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an ashtray in the center console instead of a storage compartment. Stowage compartment in the doors Ruffled pocket ; with parking disc holder : is located in the door panel. Stowage box in the rear wall between the seats A stowage compartment, in the form of a ruffled pocket, is located on the rear wall between the seats. X : Ruffled pocket Stowage net Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the rear wall behind the driver's seat. Features Reversible floor panel in the trunk 221 to the trunk lid. Otherwise the vehicle and the retractable hardtop could be damaged. Features Cup holder Important safety notes The trunk floor is level when you use the outer side of the reversible floor panel. If you turn the floor panel over, you can transport objects such as a beverage crate on the underside of the panel. Two flexible straps ; are attached to the reversible floor panel, use these to secure objects, such as wind screen =, when reversible floor panel : has been turned over. Roof carrier ! This vehicle is not designed to transport items on the roof. Roof carriers and other devices which are mounted on the roof that have not been specifically approved for this model by Mercedes-Benz must not be used as they could damage the vehicle and the retractable hardtop (vario-roof). At the time of going to print, Mercedes-Benz does not offer any roof carrier or other roofinstalled devices for this model. ! This vehicle is not designed to transport any items on the trunk lid or to allow luggage carriers or equipment of any kind to be installed If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. G WARNING The heating elements of the cup holder can become very hot. You could burn yourself on them. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot heating elements of the cup holder. Always make sure that children cannot access the hot heating elements of the cup holder. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. ! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center conZ Stowage and features G WARNING Features 222 sole can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight. Cup holder in the center console Press the outer edge of button : and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening. X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder. The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l). The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over. X Sun visors Stowage and features Overview To open: slide cover ; back. To remove the insert: slide catch : inwards on both sides in the direction of the arrow. X Remove the cup holder insert upwards. X To re-install the insert: place the insert in the stowage space. X Slide catch : outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. You can remove the cup holder insert for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. X X G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. Bottle holder Observe the "Important safety notes" in the "Stowage compartments" section (Y page 219). ! Make sure that any bottles weighing more than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged. : ; = ? A Mirror light Bracket Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover i When driving at high speeds with the side window or roof open: If you have inserted a car park ticket into retaining strip =, make sure that it is not blown away by the wind. Features To open: push the lower section of cover :. The cover opens. X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and out. X To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X To open: push the lower section of cover :. The ashtray opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. 12 V sockets General notes X The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Rthe Ra Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). Socket in the front center console To open: push the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X Z Stowage and features Ashtray 223 224 Features mbrace Stowage and features General notes You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Shortly after successfully registering with the service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by post. USA only: you can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the volume controller of the audio system/COMAND. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ ative or Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. Rthe You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To register, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call General notes An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. i You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message. Z 225 Stowage and features Features Features 226 To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. X Stowage and features i If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Breakdown assistance button ing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. i Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 227). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. i The system has not been able to initiate a X Press Roadside Assistance button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The multifunction display shows the Connect‐ ing Call message. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle RVehicle identification number i The display of the multimedia system indi- cates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by press- Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. MB Info call button Features Press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The multifunction display shows the Con‐ necting Call message. The audio system is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number i The display of the multimedia system indi- cates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. USA only: you can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. i The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button on the audio system or on COMAND for ending a telephone call i When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐ nected message in the COMAND display. If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Request for vehicle diagno‐ sis received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the display. X Confirm the message with Yes. X When the Vehicle diagnosis: Please start ignition message appears, turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X When the Please follow the instruc‐ tions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position mesZ Stowage and features X 227 228 Features Stowage and features sage appears, follow the customer service representative's instructions. The message in the display disappears. If you select Cancel the remote malfunction diagnosis is canceled completely. The vehicle operating state check begins. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis activated message. When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐ fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer Assistance center. X Press OK to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis: Transferring data... message. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message about various special offers at your workshop. USA only: this information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 28). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 25). Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 26). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Features Programming Programming the buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 228). 229 so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 229). X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 228). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable Z Stowage and features Synchronizing the rolling code Stowage and features 230 Features with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada. Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when following the programming steps. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. When indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control A for the garage door drive. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf a further remote control A is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control A. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Press either button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Features Clearing the memory 231 Setting the compass Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Stowage and features Compass Calling up the compass North America zone map Compass ; displays the compass direction in which the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW. To receive a correct display in rear-view mirror :, the compass must be calibrated and the magnetic field zone set. South America zone map X Set your location using the zone maps. Push a round pen into opening = (Y page 231) for approximately three seconds. The zone currently selected appears in compass display ; (Y page 231). X To select the zone: push a round pen into opening = (Y page 231) until the desired zone is selected. If, after a few seconds, the display in compass display ; (Y page 231) changes direction, the zone has been selected. X Z Features 232 Calibrating the compass Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic. In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following: Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines. Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster. Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. X Switch on the ignition. X Push a round pen into opening = (Y page 231) for approximately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in compass display ; (Y page 231). X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h). When the calibration has successfully been completed, the current direction is shown in compass display ; (Y page 231). Stowage and features X Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. When using floormats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place several floormats or carpets on top of one another. Slide the seat back. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X X Engine compartment Hood Rremove jewelry and watches items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Rkeep Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rnever Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Z Maintenance and care Engine compartment 233 Engine compartment 234 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Maintenance and care X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift hood :. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Only touch the following components described. Closing the hood Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.0 liter of engine oil. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. X Engine oil Notes on the oil level Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement Example Engine compartment Pull out oil dipstick :. Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system: RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired RUse of engine oil additives X X ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Example: engine oil cap Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 234). Further information on engine oil (Y page 292). X X Checking and adding other service products Checking coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Z Maintenance and care Adding engine oil 235 Engine compartment 236 Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Maintenance and care The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank :. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Further information on coolant (Y page 293). Windshield washer system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Example Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 116). X Check the coolant temperature gage in the multifunction display. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position u (Y page 116) in the ignition lock. X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap ; further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank :. X Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Example To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum fluid level of 1 US qt (1 liter), X X a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 201). Further information on windshield washer fluid/ antifreeze (Y page 294). Overview of the engine compartment Example: gasoline engine : Engine oil cap ; Oil dipstick = Brake fluid reservoir ? Washer fluid reservoir A Coolant expansion tank ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 234). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. Days RService A Due RService A Exceeded by .. Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch on the ignition. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise Z 237 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS 238 Care lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Maintenance and care Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care Notes on care H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! When cleaning your car, do not use: Rdry, coarse or hard cloths cleaning agents Rabrasive Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise, you may scratch or damage the surfaces and films. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! It is preferable to use car washes with adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that corresponds to the specification for the Cabriolet program. In car washes that use high water pressures, there is a risk that a small amount of water may leak into the vehicle. Care car wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. If you have your vehicle cleaned in a highpressure automatic car wash, small amounts of water may enter the vehicle. ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the roof are completely closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0 The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. You can clean the vehicle at an automatic car wash from the very start. Preferably clean the vehicle at automatic car washes that use textile washing elements without brushes. This prevents fine scratches from forming on the paintwork and film. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. i Vehicles with decorative film: select a wash program without hot wax at the automatic car wash. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet or the edges of decorative foils. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork or the decorative foils. Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. X Power washers G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. The water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C). ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rplug-type couplings Rlights Z Maintenance and care ! Lock the car if you wash it in an automatic 239 240 Care Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. ! Do not use high-pressure cleaners if the tank recess is open while you clean it. This can cause damage to the seals or other components. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Maintenance and care Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB TouchUp Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Matte finish care ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following can give the paint a glossy appearance and thus reduce the matt effect: RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only use automatic car washes which cor- respond to the latest technological standards. Never use wash programs which finish by treating the vehicle with hot wax. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the decorative film ! The following may have an effect on the service life and coloring of decorative film: Rsunlight Rtemperature, e.g. hot-air fan Rweather conditions Rstone impacts and dirt Rchemical cleaning agents Rgreasy substances ! Do not use any types of polish on matt decorative film. Polishing surfaces covered with film gives it a shiny finish. ! Do not treat matt or structured decorative film with wax. This may lead to marks that cannot be removed. Care i Have work or repairs on decorative film car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning wiper blades G WARNING If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Z Maintenance and care Observe the notes in the section on the care and treatment of matt paintwork (Y page 240); these notes also apply to decorative film. To clean, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additional or abrasive products, e.g. a car shampoo approved by MercedesBenz. X Remove bird droppings, tree resin or fuel as soon as possible. The decorative film may be irreparably damaged. X Dry vehicles covered with film using a soft, absorbent cloth after every wash. Water marks could otherwise form. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has been approved and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has penetrated the decorative film surface or the decorative film has become dull. The manufacturer can provide you with information on special care and cleaning products. Surfaces covered with film may appear shinier after the decorative film has been removed. 241 242 Care about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Maintenance and care ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer. Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or with cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information X X Open the camera flap (Y page 155). Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. The camera flap closes: Rif the ignition is switched off Rif the camera system is deactivated Rstarting at vehicle speeds above 6.2 mph (10 km/h) Care 243 Cleaning the exhaust pipe G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- Maintenance and care based cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by MercedesBenz. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. Z Where will I find...? 244 Where will I find...? First-aid kit Warning triangle Breakdown assistance Removing the warning triangle Warning triangle ; is secured on the inside of the trunk lid. X Open the trunk lid. X Turn lever : in the direction of the arrow. X Remove warning triangle ;. Setting up the warning triangle X X Fold feet = down and out to the side. Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper press-stud :. First-aid kit : is located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 221). X Remove first-aid kit :. Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing items. Reflective safety jacket Removing/replacing reflective safety jackets The reflective safety jackets are located in the safety jacket compartments in the stowage compartments of the front doors. There are also safety jacket compartments in the stowage compartments of the rear doors, in which reflective safety jackets can be stowed. X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag : with the reflective safety jacket by the loop. X Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the reflective safety jacket. Where will I find...? To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :. X Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety jacket compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that loop ; hangs out well within reach. i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from its packaging material before sliding it into the safety jacket compartment. The packaging material may otherwise cause it to slip out or make removing it difficult. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Notes on the reflective safety jacket 245 RThe reflective safety jackets should be disposed of and replaced with new ones: - after 15 washes, and/or - if the reflective strips have become scratched, and/or - if the backing material and/or reflective strips have become soiled and cannot be cleaned off, and/or - the reflective safety jacket's fluorescence has faded, e.g. due to the effects of sunlight RDispose of the reflective safety jacket in an environmentally responsible manner. To do so, contact your local waste disposal company. Vehicle tool kit : ; = ? A B C Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not use a laundry dryer Do not dry-clean This is a class 2 vest RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require- ments defined by the legal standard only if: - the correct size is used and - the reflective safety jacket is correctly fastened RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety jacket is clean and intact. The special properties may otherwise be compromised. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored in their original packaging in a dry place away from sources of heat and light. RThe maximum number of washes specified is not the only factor influencing the life span of the reflective safety jackets. Their life span also depends on use, care, storage, etc. The vehicle tool kit can be found in the trunk or in the stowage well under the trunk floor. Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example: Rjack Rwheel chock Rlug wrench Rratchet wrench Ralignment bolt Breakdown assistance General notes Flat tire 246 Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit Flat tire Preparing the vehicle : ; = ? X Breakdown assistance X Tire sealant filler bottle Fuse allocation chart Tire inflation compressor Towing eye Lift the trunk floor up. Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 247). i Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible. Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor (Y page 221). : ; = ? A B C D E X Folding wheel chock Fuse allocation chart Jack Sheet for faulty wheel Alignment bolt Lug wrench Towing eye Valve extractor Tire inflation compressor Remove the collapsible spare wheel (Y page 286). Your vehicle may be equipped with: Rtires with run-flat characteristics (MOExtended tires) (Y page 247) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 285) Vehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system: in the event of a flat tire, you can contact the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system customer center. Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 280). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. Flat tire General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 275). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions sages (Y page 196) Rcheck in the display mes- the tire for damage driving on, observe the following notes The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 19 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rvehicle speed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum design speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rtype and Rthe "MOExtended" mark If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that Rif you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop, for example. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). Z Breakdown assistance MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) 247 248 Flat tire G WARNING Using the TIREFIT kit In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Breakdown assistance G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 245). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X RRinse ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Remove filler hose B and plug = from the bottom section of the tire inflation compressor housing. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant bottle : until the plug engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting of tire inflation compressor ;. The cap must engage in both hooks. X Flat tire 249 Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto the valve. X Insert plug = into the cigarette lighter socket (Y page 223) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 223). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation compressor to ON. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes, see (Y page 249). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) is not achieved after a maximum of ten minutes, see (Y page 249). If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure reached G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Z Breakdown assistance X Flat tire 250 H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved after a maximum period of ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Breakdown assistance X Pull away immediately. Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X X i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 57) and (Y page 60). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household Z Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) 251 252 Battery (vehicle) rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Rreset the function for automatically folding the exterior mirrors in/out by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 91) Rset the clock On vehicles with a multimedia system, the time is set automatically. Breakdown assistance qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! Always have work on batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12volt battery yourself, please observe the following: RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. RSwitch off the ignition. RDisconnect the negative terminal first and then the positive terminal. The transmission is locked in position j after disconnecting the battery. After the work has been done, install the battery and replace the cover of the positive terminal clamp firmly. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. Jump-starting G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 253). Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine compartment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. Z Breakdown assistance Charging the battery 253 254 Jump-starting Breakdown assistance G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jumper cables are not damaged. RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. Jump-starting 255 Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 116). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device. Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. X X i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Z Breakdown assistance X 256 Towing and tow-starting Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Breakdown assistance Rthe Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 289). ! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS- GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position j when you open the driver's or front-passenger door, which could damage the transmission. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. The automatic transmission must be in position i when the vehicle is being towed away. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position i. Deactivate the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 173). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular care when removing the rear cover. Towing and tow-starting 257 In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position i when towing away the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 97). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 116). X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the transmission to position i. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning flashers start flashing again. It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 256). The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, behind the covers. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 245). X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover : off the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it. Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X X Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towed with the rear axle raised. The vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise swerve or even roll over. The automatic transmission shifts to position j automatically when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Z Breakdown assistance X Fuses 258 Transporting the vehicle Vehicles with automatic transmission You can find information on "Jump-starting" at (Y page 253). Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING Breakdown assistance ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged. All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the transmission to position i. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. X Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the trunk floor (Y page 245). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Before changing a fuse X X Switch off the engine. Switch off all electrical consumers. Fuses X or Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 116). When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 116). X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the trunk X 259 To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;. X X Close the hood. Fuse box in the trunk i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 258). i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 258). G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the partition covering. X Open the trunk lid. X To open: release cover : on the right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow. Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Open the hood. X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X To open: open clamps ;. X Remove fuse box cover : forwards. X Z Breakdown assistance Fuse box in the engine compartment 260 Operation Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel Operation When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Information on driving Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel Wheels and tires Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 284). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 271) Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 130) Rin the "Tire pressure" section G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and ask about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Operation Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Marking : shows where the bar indicator for tread wear (arrow) is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type Notes on tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. and make. Exception: it is permissible to mount a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 247). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Z Wheels and tires Check wheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures in the tires Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 261). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 263). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 285). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: Rdriving style Rtire pressure Rdistance covered 261 262 Winter operation MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by MercedesBenz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 247). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation Wheels and tires General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 280). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 266). X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 267). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 267). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 285). Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. Tire pressure To avoid hazardous situations: Tire pressure Rnever Tire pressure specifications For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheeltire combinations (Y page 284). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains installed (Y page 60). You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 285). Important safety notes G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rif The data on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel" section (Y page 286). Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tires install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. 263 264 Tire pressure Tire and Loading Information placard : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 271). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Wheels and tires Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example). The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example). Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 275). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Radversely Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Z Wheels and tires Important notes on tire pressure 265 266 Tire pressure Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage Radversely Maximum tire pressures Wheels and tires : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 263). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of: set tire pressure Rsudden loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a foreign object that has penetrated the tire Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 263). Rincorrectly Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure" section Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 263). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 267). Tire pressure The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 263). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou drive with a heavy load. Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 263). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X or Press the % button. If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, use the 9 or : button to select Cancel. X Press the a button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tire pressure monitor General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Z Wheels and tires Important safety notes 267 268 Tire pressure Example: current tire pressure display For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 269). Important safety notes Wheels and tires G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 263). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 270). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 263). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. Tire pressure Checking the tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 (Y page 116) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press a. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. Be aware that the value displayed for the position where the emergency spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Tire pressure monitor warning messages The tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires: RIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped significantly. The tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 196). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Z Wheels and tires The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for approximately a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 196). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gage are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. 269 Tire pressure 270 Wheels and tires Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 263). Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 263). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press a. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐ erence Values message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press a. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press %. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with license exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme d'industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1) L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies Canada technical specifications were met. FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with license exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme d'industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1) L'appareil Loading the vehicle Canada Radio type approval number ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies Canada technical specifications were met. IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC:2546A-GG4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with license exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme d'industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1) L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies Canada technical specifications were met. IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. : B-pillar, driver's side Z Wheels and tires Country 271 Loading the vehicle 272 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. X Wheels and tires i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Number of seats The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Example: steps 1 to 3 Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 271). All about wheels and tires Example 1 Combined max- 1500 lbs imum weight of (680 kg) occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Number of peo- 1 ple in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 2 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 175 lbs (80 kg) Occupant 2: 195 lbs (88 kg) Occupant 1: 175 lbs (80 kg) Gross weight 175 lbs of all occupants (80 kg) Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 271). Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers and the load must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants and the load) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards 370 lbs (168 kg) Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 175 lbs (80 kg) = 1325 lbs (600 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 370 lbs (168 kg) = 1130 lbs (512 kg) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Z Wheels and tires The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 273 274 All about wheels and tires Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Wheels and tires Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 261). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. All about wheels and tires Overview : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 278) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 277) Maximum tire load (Y page 277) Maximum tire pressure (Y page 266) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 278) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 275) D Load index (Y page 277) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size Z Wheels and tires Tire labeling 275 All about wheels and tires 276 description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 271). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 277). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 277). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. Wheels and tires i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires 1 Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) Or M+S i for winter tires. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. Allweather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) V i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. All about wheels and tires An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "tires" section (Y page 284). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Maximum load rating Load index Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 271). 277 i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 275). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the Z Wheels and tires DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 278 All about wheels and tires requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 284). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32 in 2014. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Wheels and tires Tire characteristics Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. All about wheels and tires Speed rating Maximum load rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. The maximum load rating is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Rthe Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Z Wheels and tires GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) 279 280 Changing a wheel Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Wheels and tires Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 246) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 247). Rotating the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel (Y page 281). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor. Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. Changing a wheel An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. 281 Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 245). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Wheels and tires Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 116). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. X i Due to differences in vehicle equipment, not all vehicles are equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack Z 282 Changing a wheel must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Wheels and tires ! Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Vehicles with AMG equipment: the vehicle has covers installed to protect the vehicle body next to the jacking points on the outer sills. X Fold cover ; upwards. Changing a wheel 283 Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X Mounting a new wheel G WARNING X Position jack ? at jacking point =. Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits completely on jacking point =. The base of the jack must lie evenly on the ground. X Turn crank A until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 280). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Z Wheels and tires G WARNING Wheel and tire combinations 284 Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel (Y page 286). Only then lower the vehicle. Wheels and tires X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. ! Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again. X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 263). When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. X Wheel and tire combinations You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. Emergency spare wheel ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 263). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rwith the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to mount a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 247). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Radapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size. Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly. not switch ESP® off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct. Rdo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Z Wheels and tires These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. 285 286 Emergency spare wheel Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels. Wheels and tires General notes You can ask for information regarding permitted emergency spare wheels at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 263). The value on the wheel is valid. An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Removing the emergency spare wheel Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor (Y page 221). Turn retaining screw ; counter-clockwise and remove it. X Remove collapsible spare wheel :. X Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 281). Stowing the emergency spare wheel ! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the collapsible spare wheel will not fit in the trunk in the intended manner. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air. Fully deflating the tires can take a few minutes. X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. X Screw the valve cap back on. X Pull the protective sheet provided with the spare wheel over the collapsible spare wheel. X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the trunk. X Use the retaining screw to pierce the protective sheet and fasten the collapsible spare wheel in place. Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the Emergency spare wheel ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (Y page 281). The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. X Remove the tire inflation compressor from the stowage space under the trunk floor (Y page 245). Pull plug ? out of the housing. Take the filler hose out of the housing. X Insert the yellow hose connector of the filler hose into the guide in the housing and push it into the fixture until the hose connector engages. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel. X Screw union nut : on the filler hose onto the valve. X Make sure the tire inflation compressor's on/ off switch A is set to OFF. X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 116). X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation compressor to ON. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure. The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A to OFF, on the tire inflation compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock. X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tire pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the filler hose from the valve. X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again. X X To remove the filler hose from the tire inflation compressor, push down the rocker switch on the hose connector and pull out the filler hose. X Stow plug ? and the filler hose in the lower section of the compressor housing. X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle. X Z Wheels and tires vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. 287 288 Vehicle electronics Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always connect two-way radios to the lowreflection exterior antenna when operating in the vehicle. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) Technical data G WARNING the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands Ronly approved antenna positions may be used Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. The following antenna positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly installed: The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics if two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example if: Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna is not correctly mounted or is not low-reflection This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Approved antenna positions : Rear fender i On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for accessory parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wir- Identification plates ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing. Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio system/ Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W X The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio system/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) : VIN ; Vehicle model Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) : VIN ; Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate Z Technical data Frequency band 289 Service products and filling capacities 290 from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Slide the front-passenger seat to its front most position. X Fold trim : upwards. VIN ; can be seen. X Technical data The VIN can also be found in the following locations: Ron the vehicle identification plate (Y page 289) Ron the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 290) Engine number : Emission control information plate, includ- ing the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) washer fluid control system refrigerant Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing, and disposing of service fluids. Components and service products must match. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. Information about tested and approved products can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.51). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. RClimate Service products and filling capacities Fuel Tank capacity Model Total capacity SLC 300 18.5 US gal (70.0 l) Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 15.8 US gal (60.0 l) Model Of which reserve SLC 300 Approx. 2.4 US gal (9.0 l) Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion. Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. Gasoline Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol (100% ethanol) RGasoline with methanol RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel RE100 Z Technical data Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 291 292 Service products and filling capacities Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. ! To ensure the longevity and full perform- ance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The fuel quality available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Engine oil General notes i For further information, consult a qualified Technical data specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. i The fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Operator's Manual depending on the country. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Information on refueling (Y page 130). Additives in gasoline ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with specifications deviating from those expressly required for the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to set replacement intervals longer than those prescribed. This could otherwise cause damage to the engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil. This could otherwise cause damage to the engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 290). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Service products and filling capacities MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval All models 229.5 i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes Filling capacities G WARNING The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. Model Capacity SLC 300 6.7 US qt (6.3 l) Mercedes-AMG SLC 43 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 290). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 290). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). Z Technical data Model 293 294 Service products and filling capacities The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked with every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 290). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Filling capacities Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model Technical data ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit Capacity SLC 300 Approx. 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Mercedes‑Benz SLC 43 AMG Approx. 8.2 US qt (7.8 l) Windshield washer system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle data Refrigerant instruction label Example: refrigerant instruction label : Symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Dimensions and weights Model dangers RHaving service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop 70.75 in (1797 mm) All other models 70.5 in (1795 mm) Refrigerant All models 19.4 ± 0.4 oz (550 ± 10 g) PAG oil 2.8 oz 80 g Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload Vehicle length 163.1 in (4143 mm) Vehicle length when opening/closing the roof Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 78.9 in (2006 mm) Vehicle height 51.2 in (1303 mm) Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 61.7 in (1566 mm) Wheelbase 95.7 in (2431 mm) Turning radius All other models Vehicle length 162.7 in (4133 mm) Vehicle length when opening/closing the roof 170.2 in (4324 mm) Z Technical data Model All models Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Mercedes-AMG SLC 43 Filling capacities Model : Opening height Mercedes-AMG SLC 43 Warning symbol : advises you about: RPossible 295 296 Vehicle data All other models Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.0 in (2006 mm) Vehicle height Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 61.06 in (1551 mm) Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm) Technical data Turning radius 34.5 ft (10.52 m)